SPM-Wiki - User contributions [en]

Contacts

2018-08-10T09:09:08Z

Ltspm:

Support for STM/Software/UHV-Systems:
Createc Fischer & Co. GmbH
Magnusstr. 11
D-12489 Berlin
Germany
Email: ltspm@createc.de
Tel.: +49 (0)30 6392 3650
Fax: +49 (0)30 6392 3659
[http://www.createc.de: www.createc.de]

Sales of LT-SPM/MBE/UHV-Systems and Parts:
Createc Fischer & Co GmbH
Industriestr. 9
74391 Erligheim
Germany
Email: sales@createc.de
Tel.: +49 (0)7143 9670-0
Fax: +49 (0)7143 9670-27
[http://www.createc.de: www.createc.de]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

Contacts

2018-08-10T09:06:57Z

Ltspm:

STM/Software/UHV-System:
Createc Fischer & Co. GmbH
Magnusstr. 11
D-12489 Berlin
Germany
Email: ltspm@createc.de
Tel.: +49 (0)30 6392 3650
Fax: +49 (0)30 6392 3659
[http://www.createc.de: www.createc.de]

UHV-System/Sales:
Createc Fischer & Co GmbH
Industriestr. 9
74391 Erligheim
Germany
Email: sales@createc.de
Tel.: +49 (0)7143 9670-0
Fax: +49 (0)7143 9670-27
[http://www.createc.de: www.createc.de]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

Forms

2017-01-01T07:22:45Z

Ltspm: /* 3d-view */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the ''Measure'' button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
File:clipgrid.png
File:clipgridimage.png
[[File:clipgrid.png]]
[[File:clipgridimage.png]]
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
File:clip3dcontrol.png
File:clip3dform.png

[[File:clip3dcontrol.png]]
[[File:clip3dform.png]]
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Å is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the ''+''/ ''-'' keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the ''Open *.Dat'' menu item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2017-01-01T07:21:37Z

Ltspm: /* Grid */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the ''Measure'' button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
File:clipgrid.png
File:clipgridimage.png
[[File:clipgrid.png]]
[[File:clipgridimage.png]]
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Å is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the ''+''/ ''-'' keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the ''Open *.Dat'' menu item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2017-01-01T06:09:44Z

Ltspm: /* Grid */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the ''Measure'' button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
File:clipgrid.png
File:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Å is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the ''+''/ ''-'' keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the ''Open *.Dat'' menu item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2017-01-01T06:06:01Z

Ltspm: /* Grid */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the ''Measure'' button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

[[File:clipgrid.png]]
[[File:clipgridimage.png]]

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Å is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the ''+''/ ''-'' keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the ''Open *.Dat'' menu item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2017-01-01T06:05:23Z

Ltspm: /* Grid */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the ''Measure'' button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
[[File:clipgrid.png]]
[[File:clipgridimage.png]]
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Å is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the ''+''/ ''-'' keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the ''Open *.Dat'' menu item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Tools

2016-12-21T09:43:33Z

Ltspm: /* Tip Etching */

== Init ==

While most of the configuration information is saved in the Windows registry, some important initialization data is saved now in the file stmafm.ini.
These data can be accessed and modified within the tool window Form_Init, or the ini file can be changed directly in a text editor.
Apart from the ADC/DAC calibration the STMAFM program usually should be restarted to put the changes in operation, at least as HW changes are involved.

ADC0/DAC0 ... Offset + Gain:
Determines the calibration data of the ADCs and DACs of the Createc ADDA board.

DAC6-9 Offset:
Input Offsets of an optional 16bit DAC Board

Machine Name:
This text is added in front of all the filenames. Used to identify the instrument or user.
Select from the picklist or write the text dirrectly.

HW_Platform:
Select from a picklist the actual hardware configuration:
0: No Board
1: C6711 : SBC6711 Board only used
2: C6711/USB2 V2 : SBC6711 DSP Board + USB2.0 connection through OPAL Kelly Board with SW Version 2
3: C6711/USB2 V3 : SBC6711 DSP Board + USB2.0 connection through OPAL Kelly Board with SW Version 3
4: C6711/Flashboot: SBC6711 DSP Board + USB2.0 connection through OPAL Kelly Board with SW Version 3 wiht boot from Flash
Mode 3 is the only mode available under Windows 7 operation
5: C6657 with Ethernet Connection

AD/DA_Board_2_Mode:
Select from a picklist the operating mode of the second AD/DA Board, if installed
0: None : Not installed
1: PLL : Used as PLL for NCAFM operation
2: AD/DA : Used as second normal AD/DA board

AFM_Mode:
Enables AFM Mode of Operation.

PLL_ZIHF2LI:
Enables use of external PLL from Zurich Instruments instead of internal PLL.

PLL_ZIHF2LI_ExtNodename:
Device name of the ZI PLL

Invert_Biasvoltage:
Set to true to permanently invert the biasvoltage.

Enable_mVInput:
For compatibilty with older versions. If enabled Voltages are input in mV.

TakeInternalHVGainvalues:
If false program reads the gain values directly from HV amplifier.
If true HV Gain values can be input from user.

Ramp_Slider:
Enables the use of the new slider hardware for coarse movement

Load_Preampvalues:
If true: When loading a datafile into the STM program, the Preamp gain as well the type of the preamplifier are taken from the file.
If false: Preamp gain and type are not changed. Protects against uncontrolled switching of the preamp.
In analysis mode this parameter has no effect, the preamp values are always loaded

SRSLockin_Enable:
Enables the use of an external lockin SRSxxx

CHMode_Icon Channel:
In case of Const height mode imaging, this value determines the channel used for the icon stored in the dat file.

Save Scan Forms:
Allows to remember the postion and number of channelforms for LAT and Vert Manipulation

Compress_Files:
Enables the compression of dat files. Uses ZIP. The parameter info is not compressed.

Enable ExtInt:
Allows to reset the DSP board by an external signal if the custom HW is installed.

Show_Hints:
If true short hints are shown the mouse cursor is above particular buttons.

Stmoutfile:
Path to a specific file loaded into the DSP during boot.(Used for test purposes,usually empty)

STM_Manual:
Path to the STM Manual file.

STM_Helpfile
Path to the STM Help file.

STM_Website:
URL to the STM website.

Press the ''Calibrate_ADCs'' Button to transfer the calibration data on the ADDA board.

[[file:clipinit.png]]

== Data Recorder ==

[[file: clipdatarecorder.png]]

== Tip Etching ==

Under the tools menu you can select this part of the program to etch STM tips. Press the ''Start Tipetch'' Button to start the tip etching. A voltage is applied to the tip and simultaneously the current is recorded. Etching will be stopped when the measured current is below a given treshold current. Pressing the ''Stop Tipetch'' button will immediately stop etching. During etching the current is recorded and displayed in the I(t) plot.

DAC Voltage
Voltage applied to the tipetching setup. A positive voltage of about 5-6V has to be applied to the tip wire.

Etch On/OFF Time
For DC etching set Etch Off Time to 0 msec. In case of pulsed etching the parameters determine the period and on/off ratio of the applied square wave signal.

Current Filter
Filters the measured current signal to avoid stopping of the etching due to noise.

Etch Level
If the measured current is below this treshold current level, the voltage will be switched off.

ADC, DAC Channels
Selection of the ADC, DAC channel used for tip etching. ADC [1-3], DAC [1-5]

Resistor
Value of the series resistor to measure the current

[[file:cliptipetching.png]]

== SpecGrid ==

This is a separate tool which allows you to analyze Gridspectroscopy files. It is intended to cover only the basic features. More detailed analysis has to be done by the user.

We suggest for exmaple MatLab for this purpose.

Basics

Gridspectroscopy creates 2 files, one which contains the spectroscopy data in binary form (file extensionand .specgrid) a normal dat file which contains the related image (file extension .specgrid.dat). Specgrid files can be very large, therefore an original file can be divided into several smaller files. (There exists also a Windows 7 64bit version to handle larger files)
The Pspcegrid30 program allows you to inspect individual spectra, extract these spectra in separate ASCII based spectroscopy files (either single files or
all files) and to display 2d images out of the spectroscopy data.

File Format Specgrid

Format Specgrid File (Extension .Specgrid)

It starts with 1024 byte long header:

version: integer;
nx,ny: integer;
dx,dy: integer;
specxgrid,specygrid: integer;
vertpoints: integer;
vertmandelay: integer;
vertmangain: integer;
biasvoltage: single;
tunnelcurrent: single;
imagedatasize: integer;
specgriddatasize: integer;
specgridchan: integer;
specgridchannelselectval: integer;
specgriddatasize64: int64;
xstart,xend,ystart,yend: integer;
dummy: array[1..236] of integer;

Latest version is 4. Beginnng with version 4 you have xstart, xend which give you the specgrid line numbers. Ystart, Yend correspondingly. For older versions you have to calculate it:
xend:=round(nx/specxgrid);
yend:=round(ny/specygrid);
xstart:=1;
ystart:=1;

Specgridchan: Number of Channels in the Spectra.
Specgridchannelselectval ist the bit pattern which detemines the type
of selected channels. (Similar to vertchannelselectval)
vertpoins: Number of points in a single spectrum.

After the header:
V and Z spectrum data: Each vertpoints long. 4byte floating point values.
V: 4 x vertpoints bytes for V
Z: 4 x vertpoints bytes for Z

After the V,Z data the spectra data are following in 4byte float format.
Spectrum1 (X=1, Y=1), Number of channels: specgridchan*(vertpoints*4)
byte for each spectrum grid point.
Spectrum2 (X=2, Y=1), ........

[[file:clipspecgrid30.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

Tools

2016-12-21T09:42:44Z

Ltspm: /* Init */

== Init ==

While most of the configuration information is saved in the Windows registry, some important initialization data is saved now in the file stmafm.ini.
These data can be accessed and modified within the tool window Form_Init, or the ini file can be changed directly in a text editor.
Apart from the ADC/DAC calibration the STMAFM program usually should be restarted to put the changes in operation, at least as HW changes are involved.

ADC0/DAC0 ... Offset + Gain:
Determines the calibration data of the ADCs and DACs of the Createc ADDA board.

DAC6-9 Offset:
Input Offsets of an optional 16bit DAC Board

Machine Name:
This text is added in front of all the filenames. Used to identify the instrument or user.
Select from the picklist or write the text dirrectly.

HW_Platform:
Select from a picklist the actual hardware configuration:
0: No Board
1: C6711 : SBC6711 Board only used
2: C6711/USB2 V2 : SBC6711 DSP Board + USB2.0 connection through OPAL Kelly Board with SW Version 2
3: C6711/USB2 V3 : SBC6711 DSP Board + USB2.0 connection through OPAL Kelly Board with SW Version 3
4: C6711/Flashboot: SBC6711 DSP Board + USB2.0 connection through OPAL Kelly Board with SW Version 3 wiht boot from Flash
Mode 3 is the only mode available under Windows 7 operation
5: C6657 with Ethernet Connection

AD/DA_Board_2_Mode:
Select from a picklist the operating mode of the second AD/DA Board, if installed
0: None : Not installed
1: PLL : Used as PLL for NCAFM operation
2: AD/DA : Used as second normal AD/DA board

AFM_Mode:
Enables AFM Mode of Operation.

PLL_ZIHF2LI:
Enables use of external PLL from Zurich Instruments instead of internal PLL.

PLL_ZIHF2LI_ExtNodename:
Device name of the ZI PLL

Invert_Biasvoltage:
Set to true to permanently invert the biasvoltage.

Enable_mVInput:
For compatibilty with older versions. If enabled Voltages are input in mV.

TakeInternalHVGainvalues:
If false program reads the gain values directly from HV amplifier.
If true HV Gain values can be input from user.

Ramp_Slider:
Enables the use of the new slider hardware for coarse movement

Load_Preampvalues:
If true: When loading a datafile into the STM program, the Preamp gain as well the type of the preamplifier are taken from the file.
If false: Preamp gain and type are not changed. Protects against uncontrolled switching of the preamp.
In analysis mode this parameter has no effect, the preamp values are always loaded

SRSLockin_Enable:
Enables the use of an external lockin SRSxxx

CHMode_Icon Channel:
In case of Const height mode imaging, this value determines the channel used for the icon stored in the dat file.

Save Scan Forms:
Allows to remember the postion and number of channelforms for LAT and Vert Manipulation

Compress_Files:
Enables the compression of dat files. Uses ZIP. The parameter info is not compressed.

Enable ExtInt:
Allows to reset the DSP board by an external signal if the custom HW is installed.

Show_Hints:
If true short hints are shown the mouse cursor is above particular buttons.

Stmoutfile:
Path to a specific file loaded into the DSP during boot.(Used for test purposes,usually empty)

STM_Manual:
Path to the STM Manual file.

STM_Helpfile
Path to the STM Help file.

STM_Website:
URL to the STM website.

Press the ''Calibrate_ADCs'' Button to transfer the calibration data on the ADDA board.

[[file:clipinit.png]]

== Data Recorder ==

[[file: clipdatarecorder.png]]

== Tip Etching ==

Under the tools menu you can select this part of the program to etch STM tips. Press the <Start Tipetch> Button to start the tip etching. A voltage is applied to the tip and simultaneously the current is recorded. Etching will be stopped when the measured current is below a given treshold current. Pressing the <Stop Tipetch> button will immediately stop etching. During etching the current is recorded and displayed in the I(t) plot.

DAC Voltage
Voltage applied to the tipetching setup. A positive voltage of about 5-6V has to be applied to the tip wire.

Etch On/OFF Time
For DC etching set Etch Off Time to 0 msec. In case of pulsed etching the parameters determine the period and on/off ratio of the applied square wave signal.

Current Filter
Filters the measured current signal to avoid stopping of the etching due to noise.

Etch Level
If the measured current is below this treshold current level, the voltage will be switched off.

ADC, DAC Channels
Selection of the ADC, DAC channel used for tip etching. ADC [1-3], DAC [1-5]

Resistor
Value of the series resistor to measure the current

[[file:cliptipetching.png]]

== SpecGrid ==

This is a separate tool which allows you to analyze Gridspectroscopy files. It is intended to cover only the basic features. More detailed analysis has to be done by the user.

We suggest for exmaple MatLab for this purpose.

Basics

Gridspectroscopy creates 2 files, one which contains the spectroscopy data in binary form (file extensionand .specgrid) a normal dat file which contains the related image (file extension .specgrid.dat). Specgrid files can be very large, therefore an original file can be divided into several smaller files. (There exists also a Windows 7 64bit version to handle larger files)
The Pspcegrid30 program allows you to inspect individual spectra, extract these spectra in separate ASCII based spectroscopy files (either single files or
all files) and to display 2d images out of the spectroscopy data.

File Format Specgrid

Format Specgrid File (Extension .Specgrid)

It starts with 1024 byte long header:

version: integer;
nx,ny: integer;
dx,dy: integer;
specxgrid,specygrid: integer;
vertpoints: integer;
vertmandelay: integer;
vertmangain: integer;
biasvoltage: single;
tunnelcurrent: single;
imagedatasize: integer;
specgriddatasize: integer;
specgridchan: integer;
specgridchannelselectval: integer;
specgriddatasize64: int64;
xstart,xend,ystart,yend: integer;
dummy: array[1..236] of integer;

Latest version is 4. Beginnng with version 4 you have xstart, xend which give you the specgrid line numbers. Ystart, Yend correspondingly. For older versions you have to calculate it:
xend:=round(nx/specxgrid);
yend:=round(ny/specygrid);
xstart:=1;
ystart:=1;

Specgridchan: Number of Channels in the Spectra.
Specgridchannelselectval ist the bit pattern which detemines the type
of selected channels. (Similar to vertchannelselectval)
vertpoins: Number of points in a single spectrum.

After the header:
V and Z spectrum data: Each vertpoints long. 4byte floating point values.
V: 4 x vertpoints bytes for V
Z: 4 x vertpoints bytes for Z

After the V,Z data the spectra data are following in 4byte float format.
Spectrum1 (X=1, Y=1), Number of channels: specgridchan*(vertpoints*4)
byte for each spectrum grid point.
Spectrum2 (X=2, Y=1), ........

[[file:clipspecgrid30.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

Forms

2016-12-21T09:40:50Z

Ltspm: /* LineScan */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the ''Measure'' button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Å is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the ''+''/ ''-'' keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the ''Open *.Dat'' menu item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:39:20Z

Ltspm: /* Load Files */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Å is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the ''+''/ ''-'' keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the ''Open *.Dat'' menu item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:37:23Z

Ltspm: /* Slider */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Å is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the ''+''/ ''-'' keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:36:03Z

Ltspm: /* Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number.R#Number." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:34:44Z

Ltspm: /* Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM'' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number'.R#Number'." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:34:07Z

Ltspm: /* Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the ''VM' button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L#Number'.R#Number'." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:29:44Z

Ltspm: /* Lateral Manipulation */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button ''LM'' and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[Å/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [Å/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press ''2.Axis'')
''LP'' Low Pass Filter
''TP'' Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the <VM> button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[A/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L<Number>.R<Number>." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:27:48Z

Ltspm: /* 3d-view */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the ''3d View'' button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the ''Box'' box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button <LM> and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[A/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [A/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the <VM> button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[A/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L<Number>.R<Number>." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:26:41Z

Ltspm: /* TimeSpectrum */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the ''Start'' Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the ''TS'' button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the <3d view> button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the <Box> box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button <LM> and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[A/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [A/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the <VM> button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[A/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L<Number>.R<Number>." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:25:38Z

Ltspm: /* Grid */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the ''Mouse'' button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the ''Rotation'' button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the ''Zoom'' button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the ''X..,Y..'' button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the ''Move grid to Center'' button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The ''Transform'' button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the ''HexGrid'' check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the <Start> Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the <TS> button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the <3d view> button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the <Box> box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button <LM> and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[A/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [A/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the <VM> button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[A/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L<Number>.R<Number>." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:23:25Z

Ltspm: /* Rampcontroller */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the ''Ramp'' button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the Crash Protection is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the ''Approach'' button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. ''Approach'' stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the ''Quit'' button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the ''Main/Coarse'' button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the <Mouse> button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the <Rotation> button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the <Zoom> button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the <X..,Y..> button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the <Move grid to Center> button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The <Transform> button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the <HexGrid> check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the <Start> Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the <TS> button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the <3d view> button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the <Box> box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button <LM> and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[A/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [A/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the <VM> button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[A/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L<Number>.R<Number>." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Forms

2016-12-21T09:20:33Z

Ltspm: /* LineScan */

== LineScan ==

Press the ''Lin'' Button to take a line scan of the image. First select two points of the image by pressing the left mouse button. The linescan
is displayed in the upper linegraph of the linescanform-window. To perform measurements on the linescan press the <Measure> button.

Use the left mouse button to select a new point. With the right mouse button you can switch between points. Pressing the Shift button allows to move a whole line. Pressing the right mouse button together with the Shift button will switch to the prependicular averaging mode.

Important: If the linescan form is opened through the menue selection first, all linescan data will be displayed always in the this particular window. Otherwise pressing the LIN button will always open a new window.

Autosize
Selects automatic scaling of the linegraph

Autolinebacksub
Selects automatic subtraction of linear background

Line Display Trackbar
Move to show a line scan of a particular image line. A FFT of the selected line is shown in the lower line graph.(The number of points/line has to be a power of 2)

Popup menu of upper linegraph
xydesign: Select to adjust the appearance of the line graph
CopyClipboardData: The line scan data are copied to the ClipBoard
CopyClipboardXYGraph: The line scan graph is copied to the ClipBoard
Printxygraph: The line scan graph is send to the printer
Measure: Do measurements of the plot data.
Redrawline: The line in the image is redrawn

Popup menu of lower linegraph
has the same items as the upper popup menu and one additional entry:
Show Frequency: Gives the FFT in frequency [Hz] instead of inverse distance [1/Å] (updated when the Line Display Trackbar is moved)

Channels
Select the channels which are displayed

[[file:cliplinescan.png]]

[[file:cliplinescanpopupmenu.png]]

== Rampcontroller ==

Click on the <Ramp> button. This opens the 'Rampcontroller'-window with control elements necessary to perform the coarse approach. The 6 buttons with arrows in the top of the form correspond to moving the tip in respect to the sample surface. Moving in x/y direction can also be done using the x/y cursor keys on the keyboard. The page up and page down keys are used correspondingly for rotation up and down. Selecting the burst mode in x/y or rotation will result in a series of steps corresponding to the number of burst steps displayed in the ramp parameter list. When the <Crash Protection> is switched on, the program checks before each step, whether it can detect a tunneling current. If this is the case it will cancel the step. Usually the crash protection should be switched on, but in cases where the tip is already crashed, the protection has to be switched off. The program issues some warnings when the ramp windows opens to inform the user to do necessary changes for a successful ramping. These are: First retract the tip, reset the x- and y-offset in the STM-program, select the appropriate gain (1-10, depending on the temperature) in the x- and y- channel of the HV-amplifier and set the external offset voltages to zero.
The usual coarse approach is done by controlling the approach with an optical microscope. When the tip is close enough, the automatic tip approach can be switched on, by pressing the <Approach> button. It will start a combination of single coarse approach rotation steps combined with tip approach testing until the tip can reach the sample. The <Approach> stops when a tunneling current is detected. The value of this threshold current is set by the current slider. Important: When the approach stops, the tip is automatically retracted, by setting the current to zero. Before leaving the coarse approach by pressing the <Quit> button, you have to select the mode for scanning. When the <Main/Coarse> button displays 'Coarse' mode, then the outer 3 piezos are used for scanning, otherwise the center piezo is used. In the normal operation of the microscope the 'Coarse' mode should be selected. Select the required set point current to see if the approach was successful. Now the tip should be retracted manually by using the external HV-amplifier z-offset voltage to go out of tunneling. Select the required gains and re-approach the tip again.

See also: Approach Tips

The Coarse Approach operation is controlled by the following parameters:

Puls Height[V]
Input the peak to peak height (in V) of the sawtooth pulse used for moving the inertial slider. Two different values are used for the lateral XY motion and the rotational motion.

Puls-Duration[sec]
Input the duration of a single sawtooth pulse in seconds.

Burst-Count
Determines the number of sawtooth pulses applied when operating the coarse control in burst mode.

Approach Period[sec]
Determines the time for a single approach cycle including approach and retraction of the tip to find the sample surface.

Approach Burst Count
This is the number of coarse pulses applied between two approach cycles.

Approach Retry Count
This is the number of retry operations done before the approach is stopped.

[[file:cliprampcontrollerCreatec.png]]

== Grid ==

The form 'Grid-Image- Transformation' contains several functions for different kinds of image transformations. A suitable combination of the procedures below will allow transformations useful for drift correction, superstructure analysis, extraction of registry information. To open the form press on the grid button in the STMAFM form. With the 6 slider controls a grid can be overlayed on the image. The lateral position, the angles of the grid and the distance between the grid lines can be adjusted. An alternative way to input the grid is pressing the <Mouse> button and to mark 3 points (the first one is the center, the other two determine the direction of the two lines). Pressing the <Rotation> button will rotate the image in such a way that one set of the grid lines (X-Axis) is parallel to the horizontal direction. Pressing the <Zoom> button will zoom the image by the value set in the edit control positioned next to the right of the button. The image is zoomed around the center point of the grid. By pressing on the <X..,Y..> button the actual center position of the grid is stored and displayed on the button. Selecting a new center position with the mouse, as described above, and pressing the <Move grid to Center> button will move the new defined center to the stored center position. The <Transform> button will transform the image according to the 2 Parameters in the edit controls below. The first is the new angle between the lines in the image and the second is the new ratio the grid line distances. Selecting the <HexGrid> check box will draw a grid suitable for hexagonal unit cells. If draw inverted is selected the grid is drawn by a inversion process. Otherwise you can select with <Grid Color> the line color of the grid.

<gallery caption="" widths="400px" heights="400px">
file:clipgrid.png
file:clipgridimage.png
</gallery>

== TimeSpectrum ==

It is very often useful to take a time record of the A/D input channels, without scanning or changing the biasvoltage. This is for example a convenient way to characterize the noise performance of the STM. To take a time record just press the <Start> Button on the Time-Spectrum window or press the <TS> button on the main window. Five channels are recorded simultaneously. The A/D channels 0 and 3 (ADC0 is called current I) and the topography signal output from the feedback loop, called Z. The displayed channel is selected by the corresponding channel button. Three parameters control the data acquisition:

Spec_Points
The number of data points taken for a single spectrum. This must be a power of 2, to allow FFT of the data.
(Maximum is 4096)

Spec_Freq[Hz]
The sampling frequency. (Limited by the DSP_Clock value)

Spec_Avrg_Count
The number of spectra averaged. Averaging is done only for the spectrum, i.e. the FFT data.

Channels
First select the check boxes to determine the channels which are acquired during data acquisition
Part of these channels can be further selected to be displayed.

The results are displayed in two line graphs.
The upper one shows the time behaviour. (The vertical scale is always in V)
The lower one shows the frequency spectrum. (The vertical scale on the left shows the peak to peak value of a pure sine component,
the right scale the rms amplitude for non correlated signals)

The frequency resolution depends on the number of points and the sampling frequency.
Important: The current signal and the ADC1 signal are filtered by a first order digital filter, which is controlled by the same CurrentRC Parameter.
The contents of the memo field is saved together with the file.

In the lower right the AVRG Value and the Standard Deviation of the timespectra data are shown.

Save
The data is saved in ASCII Format

FFT logscale: Displays the Spectrum in LogScale

Waterfall: Displays the time dependence of the Spectra in a Waterfall like mode at the bottom of the window

[[file:cliptimespectrum.png]]

== 3d-view ==

This part of the program allows the display of 3d views of selected parts of the images. To start, open the window by clicking the <3d view> button. Then click on <New Data> in the main menue and select a rectangular region on the image displayed in the STMAFM program. A new form will be opened, where the rendered image is displayed. The sliders in the 3d-view form allow to change the orientation, size, offset and lighting of the 3d object. The 3d image can be displayed in different ways, depending on which check boxes are checked. So the lights can be switched on or off, the 3d image can be shown using lines, hidden lines, or in the normal surface view. Checking the save box will start saving of each images displayed. With this feature a series of BMP images for movies can be created. Checking the <Box> box will draw a 3d box with x,y,z axes in the 3dimage.In the light sources field the angle of the light source can be changed. Apart from a directed diffuse light source ambient lighting can be added.

Under the menue item Color the color of the background and of the lines can be changed.
Morover the image can be copied to the clipboard (in BMP format), to a new window or the data can be exported in PoVRay format.
(New List means that a new imagedisplaylist is created for the underlying OPENGL rendering program. This usually done automatically)

Selected views can be saved and are saved with the program.

<gallery caption="" widths="450px" heights="300px">
file:clip3dcontrol.png
file:clip3dform.png
</gallery>

== Lateral Manipulation ==

To perform a lateral manipulation with the tip one has first to press the Button <LM> and then to select the starting and the final position of the manipulation path by selecting these points in the image with the left mouse button. A thin line is drawn on the screen between these points. After the manipulation is completed a separate window opens up where the tip height and current during the manipulation is displayed. By pressing the save button this data set can be saved in a *.LAT File.

Different kinds of manipulation procedures can be performed. They are selected by choosing a certain manipulation mode number in the manipulation parameter field. These different modes are described in the following. The speed of the tip is controlled by the parameters latmandelay and latmanddx, which are used throughout the whole process and not only when the tip is manipulating.

Mode 1: This is the simplest constant current mode manipulation. Starting from the top of the image the tip moves in a straight line to the starting point of the manipulation using the standard feedback parameters used for imaging. Then the feedback parameters are switched to the ones selected in the lateral manipulation parameter set . These are current, voltage and gain of the preamplifier. Then the tip moves using these manipulation parameters to the final position. There the parameters are set back to their original imaging values and the tip moves back to top of the image.

Mode 2: Similar to mode 1, but the tip moves first to the final position, then starts the manipulation to the starting position and goes back to final position. It switches back to imaging parameters and moves to the top of the image.

Mode3: Similar to mode 1: The tip first moves to the starting point. Then it moves to final position and back to the starting position using the normal imaging parameters, but the tip height and current are recorded during these two scans. Then the parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and the tip moves to the final position. Then the parameters are changed back to the imaging parameters and the tip moves back to the starting position while again recording the tip height and current. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image.

Mode 4: This is a constant height manipulation mode. The tip moves first to the starting position. Then it moves from the starting to the final position and back taking data in normal imaging mode. Then the feedback is switched off and the tip moves from the starting to the final position in constant height mode. The height used is given by the height of the tip when the feedbackloop is switched off plus the additional offset given by latmanccdz. This means that the height depends on the imaging parameters. Then the tip moves back from the final position to the starting position in imaging mode, but taking data again. Finally the tip moves to the top of the image. With the extension factor the manipulation path can be extended at the final position by the factor given by latmanextlextension. The starting point is not affected by the extension factor.

Mode 5: Similar to mode 4. In this mode the extension affects also the starting position. The extension positions are first calculated. The tip moves in imaging mode to extended starting position. Then moves to the final extended position and backward and takes data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves to the starting position, while taking data in imaging mode. Then the tip moves from the starting position to the final position in constant height manipulation mode. Then it moves back to the starting position in imaging mode and takes data. Finally it moves back to the top of the image.

Mode 6: Similar to mode 5. The only difference is that the tip moves from the starting to the final position and backward in constant height mode and not only in the forward direction, as done in mode 5.

Mode 0: This mode is different from the other modes. In mode 0 the tip follows always the mouse position immediately. The height of the tip is displayed on rate meter appearing on the left. By pressing the upper case L key the imaging parameters are switched to the manipulation parameters and back again. (By pressing the upper case S a small 64 pixel * 64 pixel scan is performed.) Clicking with the mouse button will stop the continuous following of the tip. After additional clicking the tip moves to the new mouse position in a straight line and tracks the mouse position again.

These parameters control the lateral manipulation processes.

Mode
Select one of several different manipulation modes. There are constant current and constant height modes. For example P0 is the origin of the image. Then the tip moves to P1, the first point selected with the mouse. The tunneling parameters are changed to manipulation parameters and the tip moves from P1 to P2. There the normal tunneling parameters, used for imaging, are selected again and the tip moves to the origin P0.

Voltage[V]
The tunneling voltage applied during the manipulation phase.

Current[nA]
The current used during manipulation

Gain preamplifier
The gain used during manipulation

Manip. Speed[A/sec]
The speed of the tip for lateral movements. Used for all movements. Step Size determines the number points measured during a lat. manip. scan.

Extension
Extension value for manipulation modes 4-6

Const. Height Z-Offset
In constant height mode the tip sample distance can be varied by this parameters. Positive values [Å} correspond to a closer approach to the surface.

Channels
Select the channels acquired during data acquisition

LatChannelForm
Press to open a new Form to display the manipulation data.

Lateral Speed [A/sec]
Speed at which the tip is moving from the origin to first starting point

LM in old place
Repeat the LM using the previous coordinates

Load Ext Lat Par
Load the lateral manipulation cooordinates from an external file.

[[file:cliplatmanip.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:cliplmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Vertical Manipulation / I/V Spectroscopy ==

Vertical manipulation (spectroscopy) is started by pressing on the <VM> button and selecting a point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. The tip uses the lateral speed value to move to the vertical manipulation position. When the manipulation is finished the measured data appears in a separate window and can be saved with the Save button. Different channels can be selected to be recorded. Usually an external Lockin will be connected to ADC1. The internal Lockin supplies the signals dI/dV, d2I/dV2, di_q,d2_q. The form of the voltage and the z-height ramp is controlled by 8 points in time. In the case of the voltage one can define 8 time points and their corresponding voltage value. For example (0,1000), (256,0), (512,2000),(1024,-1000) define a ramp starting with 1000mV at time 0. Then it will be linear interpolated to time 256 with 0 Volt. Then it goes up again to 2000mV at time 512 and finally reaches -1000mV at time 1024. The time values correspond to the number of points taken. In this case these are 1024 points. A maximum of 100000 points is possible. The z-height values already include the gain of the z-amplifier. This means, that changing the HV gain will not change the z-height ramp, because this will be automatically corrected. Vertspecback = 1 will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction. Vertspecback=n will apply the ramp in forward and backward direction n-times (n>=1). The shape of the ramps is shown in the lower graph in the vertical manipulation window.

Vertical spectroscopy can be done during scanning. Press the VM Button and select a point in the unscanned image area.

These parameters control the vertical manipulation and spectroscopy

Gain preamplifier
Gain of the preamplifier during data acquisition

Speclenght[sec]
Select the recording total time of the spectrum.

Spectrum backward
0: The Spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken only once.
1: The spectrum defined in the V,Z table is taken once in forward and once in backward direction
>1: Defines how often a forward and backward spectrum is taken

Lateral Speed[A/sec]
Speed at which the tip moves to the place where the spectrum will be taken.

Z- Offset
Defines an additonal offset which is added to the z values in the table

Z-Drift
Defines an increment which is added to the values in the table to compensate drift effects

Repeat Count
Defines how many separate spectra are taken and stored.

Spectra/Line
Defines the number of spectra equally spaced along a line between a start and endpoint,selected by mouse input.
The first spectrum is taken at the startpoint of the line the last one at the endpoint of the line.

V,Z table
4 points can be defined to create a voltage and z table used for vertical manipulation and spectroscopy. The data values are plotted in the graph below. The first Time Value should be set to 1 (not 0, still allowed for compatibility), otherwise the first value might not be displayed.
(Voltage(green), Z-Position(blue))

Spec_X_Grid
Spec_Y_Grid
Determine the spacing of the spectroscopy grid. First spectrum position is (spec_x_grid,spec_y_grid) in pixel coordinates.

SGrid_Channel
Number of channels recorded during the grid spectroscopy mode

SpecGrid_Delay
Delay in DSP cycle units added before/after a vertical spectrum is started/finished.

SpecAvrgCount
Number of Spectra acquired and averaged directly on the DSP board. For Count>1 be aware that the current preamplifier gain for vertical spectroscopy will be set the same to the normal preamplifer gain. Between the spectra the feedback loop will be switched on to readjust the sample tip distance.

SpecAvrgFBDelay
On Time of the Feedback loop in DSP cycle units between spectra in Averaging mode.

Save File
Save the present Vert. Spektrum

Single_Spectrum
Take one single spectrum. Select the position with a left mouse button click on the image.
Same like pressing <VM> button

Spectra along Line
Take a series of spectra equally spaced a long a line defined by two mouse clicks.

Spec in old Place
Take a spectrum at the X,Y position of the previous scan.

Multiple Spectra
Select several spectra taken one after the other. Left Mouse button select another spectrum, right mosue button stop selection and start data acquisition.

MultSpec from File
Use an external file (Ascii) to define a series of spectra.
Only 256*256 pixel images allowed. No zoom. First line contains number of spectra. Each following line contains the x y image coordinates(integer) of each spectrum.

Spectra on Grid
Spectra taken at each grid position. (Analysis of the Grid data is done in another program)

SaveSpecgrid
Save the Grid File. Two files are saved. One *.specgrid.dat File with all the parameters and the *.specgrid File with the grid data

VFB_Mode
Select the VoltageFeedbackMode
I(V,z): Normal Operation feedback loop is OFF
z(V): Constant current operation

VFB_Current[nA]
Current setpoint used in z(V) Mode. FB_Channel has to be current.

Load Vert_Params
Load only the parameter of a spectrum and not the data

External VZ Data
If not checked the VZ Data for a spectrum are taken from the VZ-Table parameter.
If checked the VZData is taken from a different source table, which can be loaded from an external file.
This allows the user defined design of arbitrary VZ arrays of up to 100000 points. File format see below.

Filenames:
First Letter is the machinename, in case you have more than one LTSTM or you want to assign different users.
Followed by DATE.TIME.VERT. VERT is the standard fileextension.
In case you take repeated spectra in a point or take spectra along a line an additional "L<Number>.R<Number>." indicator is added before
the VERT file extension. L indicates line position and R indicates the numbering in repeat mode.

[[file:clipvertmanp.png]]

The measured data is displayed in separate windows. X and Y scaling can be adjusted by the user. Two independent axis can be displayed. (Press <2.Axis>)
<LP> Low Pass Filter
<TP> Makes the Windows transparent to put it on top of another window.

[[file:clipvmanip.png]]

Right click to open the Popupmenu.
XYDesign, XY Series Edit allows to change the appearance of the Data
Copyclipboard.. copies the Plot or the Data into the clipboard
PrintXYGraph prints the XY Plot
Measure allows measuring the distance between points in the plot
AutoUpdate: The Plot is updated every second during Data Acquisition.
Lowpass filters the data (very simple just nearest neighbor average)

[[file:clipvertmanip_popupmenu1.png]]

== Slider ==

Brightness and Contrast
Use the slider window to control the brightness and contrast of the image. The slider marked B adjusts the brightness of the image. The slider marked Z controls the contrast. Above both sliders the corresponding height range in (+/-)Angstroem is displayed.So total height difference between black and white for example is two times the displayed value. On the right for multichannel images the channel, which is displayed can be selected.

Biasvoltage
The polarity of the biasvoltage can be changed by pressing with the mouse on 'V' label, or by pressing the <+>/ <-> keys.

Press the right mouse button on the 'V' label to open a Popupmenu for the biasvoltage.
Three options exist:
SetBiasMinvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the minimum biasvoltage.
SetBiasMaxvolt: If selected sets the current biasvoltage as the maximum biasvoltage.
This feature can be used to avoid tunneling outside a specific bias voltange range. i.e for example to limit the maximum biasvoltage to protect the tip, when using the silder.

ResetBiasMinMax: If selected deletes the Min/Max values again.

Current
Press the right mouse button on the 'A' label to open a Popupmenu for the current.

Log: logarithmic scaling of the current slider
Lin: linear scaling of the current slider

Channels
Select the displayed channel. For Channel Nr.= 0 all channels are displayed.

Zoom
Allowed zoom factors are x1, x2, x3, x4.

Tip up/down
Press this button to fully retract or to approach the tip.

[[file:clipslider.png]]

The height of the slider window can be adjusted. This changes the height of the sliders simultaneously.

== FFT Evaluation ==

This part of the software allows use to analyse FFT transforms of the images. (Always crosscheck the results)

[[file:clipfftevaluation.png]]

== Load Files ==

Loading Files is done using the <Open *.Dat> menue item.

You can define your own favorite directories in the Windows Places Bar region. (Use for example the TweakUI utility.)

Options:

Full Parameter Load: Check to load all parameters, not only those relevant for the loaded file type.

Disable Warning: If checked no warning will be given when files are loaded in data acquisition.

[[file:cliploadfile.png]]

Open allows to select in running program or alternatively in a newly opened analysis program.

[[file:cliploadfile2.png]]

== AFM ==

In the following we discuss the operation of the internal PLL system.
The internal PLL can operate up to 32kHz ( based on 16 samples per period at 512kHz max sample rate).
This usualy covers operation of standard quartz tuning fork sensors as the qPlus sensor.
(For higher frequencies optionally the Zurich Instruments PLL can be used externally.)
The input signal from the Preamplifier is connected to the ADC3 input of ADDA Board 2, while DAC5 of the same ADDA Board supplies the excitation signal.

PLL Centerfreq: determines the center frequency of the PLL. (Change either by typing the number directly or increase/decrease by using the up/down/ page up/page down and both in combination with Shift key)
PLL-Ampl[nm]: Input the Set value of the Amplitude in nm when the Amplitude controller is on
PLL-Exc[V]: Input the Excitation value in Volt
PLL-Phase: Phase Shift of Exciation Signal. Has to be optimized const stable PLL operation
PLL F Range[+/-Hz]: PLL frequency tracking range. max. allowed deviation from center frequency

PLL On: If selected operation of the PLL is switched on
Ampl Control: If selected Amplitude Control is switched on
Active Damping: If selected the Amplitude control can electronically damp the cantilever vibration
Ref Signal f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the PLL frequency
Ref Signal 2f: If selected DAC2 of the PLL board outputs a reference of the 2nd harmonic of the PLL frequency

P[Hz/Deg]: Proportional value of the PLL frequency controller
Int[Hz/deg/s]: Integrator value of the PLL frequency controller
LP Filter[Hz]: Value of the 4th order loop filter
P Ampl[V/nm]: Proportional part of the Ampl controller
LP Amp filter[Hz]: Loop filter of the Amp controller
df Post Filter[Hz]: Filters the PLL freq data finally before it is output to the STM feedback controller

Sensor Cal[V/nm]: Calibrate the Preamp output in nm units
SRS Gain: Optionally include the SRS Preamp gain

PLL FreqScan, PLL Phase Scan: Start a frequency or Phase Scan
Filter PLL_Scan: Filter the Scan Data. (simple 1.order lowpass). can be repeated to allow a beeter calculation of the Q factor etc.
Show Phase: Displays the phase. Has to be selected to calculate the Q Factor.

Results: Automatic determination of CenterFreq and Q Factor

ScancenterFreq, FreqSpan, ScanTime, ScanPoints: determines the properties of the Frequency Scan or PLL Phase Scan

[[file:Resonance.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

== 20 steps to successful AFM operation ==

For a first setup of a functioning PLL useful for scanning in CC, CH or CF mode please refer to the following graphical guide.

[[File:Folie2.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie3.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie4.PNG|800px]]

[[File:Folie5.PNG|800px]]

In order to start scanning please perform the following steps:
a) For constant current mode (CC, dynamic STM)
14. Approach the tip and observe the frequency shift changing from Δf=0 Hz to a finite negative value.
15. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window in order to measure these signals.
16. Set the current setpoint to a finite value, i.e. e.g., 10 or 100 pA.
17. Start scanning in CC mode as you would do in STM mode.

b) For constant force mode (CF, nc-AFM)
14. Change the feedback mode to ''LinAbs'' and the feedback channel to ''dF''.
15. Change the integrator value to e.g. -0.0003 or something in the same order of magnitude.
16. Select the channels ''dF'', ''Amplitude'' and ''Damping'' in the Parameter window.
17. Set the constant frequency setpoint to a value close to but a little bit smaller than the finite Δf value from above.
18. Start scanning in CF mode as you would do in STM mode.
19. Adjust the scanning speed and the integrator together with the amplitude and phase control of the tuning fork.
20. Observe the current signal and increase the setpoint in order to go closer to the surface.

Parameter

2016-12-21T09:18:30Z

Ltspm: /* Scan */

== Scan ==
The position of the tip (x,y,z) is controlled by three 20bit D/A converters. Range ( -524288 .. +524287 corresponding to –10V to +10V).The orientation is chosen in the following way: negative X Values are located on the left side of the image, positive Y values are located at the bottom of the image. The origin of the image is without additional offset values at point (0,0). This corresponds to the point in the Y top and X-center of the image. (The origin of the image can be changed using the setxyoffset – command, which changes the OffsetX,Y values).
The size of the image is defined by the distance between the image points in DAC units (Delta X,Y) and the number of image points. The corresponding size of the image is in Angström: DeltaX*NumX/(524287)*10V* GainX*XPIEZOCONST[Å/V] (similar to Y, Z). T
Size, Speed, Pixelnumber(with certain limitations) can be changed during scanning. Top-down and Bottom-Up scanning is supported.

Scan operation is controlled by the following parameters:

'''Image Size(Pixel):'''
Input the number of pixels of the image to be acquired. X is the value of the horizontal scan direction.

'''Image Size(Å):'''
Input the size of the image [Å]. It is important that the Piezo-Sensitivity factors have been correctly chosen. The deflection sensitivity is temperature dependent!

'''Scanning Speed[Å/sec]:'''
Value of the scanning speed [Å/s]. Input values will be adjusted regarding to hardware restrictions. For higher speeds larger internal step sizes will be chosen. Also the time it takes for a single line (only forward direction time) and the time to take a complete image are displayed.

'''Biasvoltage[V]:'''
Input of tunneling bias voltage [V]. The bias voltage value can be also changed with the Voltage - Slider. The Bias-Polarity can be switched by pressing the ''+'' or ''-'' Keys or by mouse clicking on the '+V' or '-V' - Label at the voltage - slider.

'''Rotation[Deg]:'''
Rotation of the scanning direction in degree. Rotation is around the center point in the top image scan line (0,0 point)

'''Rot_center:'''
If checked the rotation is done around the image center.

'''Channels:'''
Select the channels which will be measured during a scan operation.

'''I-Preamp Gain:'''
Select the gain of the gain switchable current preamplifier. The value is the base 10 logarithm of the gain in [Å/V].

'''Constant Current - Constant Height:'''
Select either scanning in normal constant current or in constant height mode. In constant height mode the topography signal is automatically substituted by the current signal.

'''Forward - Backward Scandirection:'''
Normally data is taken only when scanning from left to right. If forward+backward is selected then data is acquired in both directions. As an example if only one channel is active the uneven lines are taken from left to right and the even lines are taken from right to left.

'''Multivoltage:'''
Another option is the multiple voltages mode. In this mode a series of images are taken in parallel line by line, while for each image a different bias voltage is applied. The different bias voltages are taken from the neighboring MultiVolt table. Only the voltages up to the first voltage which is equal to zero are used up to a maximum of 6 voltages. The individual images are saved in the same file and appear in one single image window

'''PlanDX, PlanDY:'''
An average tilt of the sample can be compensated by using these parameters. The user can input these parameters manually or use the automatic feature. This is done the following way. Take an image. Use the <Pln> Button and input 3 points to subtract a plane. Then select the Set_Plan_DX_DY feature under the DSP item in the main menu. It is important to realize that thermal drift or piezo creep will significantly disturb the Plan_DY value. To improve that you could take an image rotated by 90deg and follow the above procedure. This will give you a better Plan_DY value, but less precise Plan_DX value. Combination of both allow you to both values with higher precision. Important: Check the new values, especially before you take a constant height image.

'''Offset_X,Offset_Y:'''
The X,Y offset voltages of the origin of the image. Double Click the Offset_X Label to switch between [V] and [Å] units

'''Repeat Control:'''
Use these parameters to acquire image series with precise timing.

'''Count:''' The number of images to be taken.

'''Interval:''' Select the time interval [s] when a new image scan is started. (must be larger then the time to acquire a single image)

The files are automatically saved with the file extension R.DAT

'''Const. Height Z-Offset, Preamp gain, Bias Voltage: '''
In constant height mode different values for the Preamp Gain and the Biasvoltage can be applied.
In constant height mode scanning Zoffset determines an additional perpendicular shift of the tip after the feedback loop has been switched off.

'''Piezoconstants:'''
These are calibration constants to determine the piezo sensitivity [Å/V]. Be aware that these parameters are temperature dependant.

'''HV_Gain:'''
Displays the gain of the x,y,z channels of the Createc HV Amplifier

[[file:clipscan.png]]

== DSP ==
The digital feedback controller is operated by the following parameters.

'''FB-Mode:'''
Select whether the current signal from the FB Channel is applied directly to the digital feedback controller (Lin(I)), or the logarithm of the signal (Log(I)) or the absolute value (Abs(I)) is calculated first.

'''FB-Channel:'''
Here the value of the channel can be selected which is used as input signal of the Feedback Loop controller.

SetPoint[A or Hz]:
Setpoint value of the current or df signal.

'''Integrator-RC:'''
This value sets the response time of the integrator part of the PI controller. Only the integrator part is usually installed.

'''P-Gain:'''
This value sets the proportional part of the PI controller.

'''Current Low Pass[Hz]:'''
The current signal from ADC0 can be recorded during scanning. Before the signal is stored on the PC the signal is low pass filtered. The edge frequency of this low pass filter can be set by this parameter.

'''Integrator and P-Gain Slider:'''
The Integration and P-Gain values can be continuously modified using the two sliders. The original values input manually in the text boxes can be changed by 0.1 - 10.0 by slider movement. Both values can be changed during scan operation to optimize feedback operation.

[[file:clipDSP.png]]

== Tip Forming ==
Tip forming (controlled crashing of the tip) is similar to the vertical manipulation procedure, but uses independent parameters to simplify the intermittent use of tip forming and vertical manipulation/spectroscopy. Tip forming is performed by first pressing on the tip forming button <TF> and then marking a particular point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. Similar to vertical manipulation the data taken during the tip formation are displayed in the vertical manipulation form. The parameters used are TipForm_Vol, which is the voltage applied to the sample during the tip forming process. Then TipForm_Z [mV] , which means that the tip is moved towards the sample by Z x Zpiezoconst for the tip forming. (The gain of the z - HV amplifier is automatically included). The preamplifier gain is always set to gain 106.

'''Voltage[V]'''
Voltage applied during the tip forming manipulation process.

'''Z-Approach'''
Defines how far the tip moves towards the sample during a tip forming process

'''Pulslength[sec]'''
Defines how long a complete tip forming approach takes.

'''Lateral Speed[A/sec]'''
Defines how fast the tip moves to the selected tip contact position

[[file:cliptipform.png]]

== Lockin ==

The new version of STMAFM has an internal lockin integrated in the DSP software. The internal lockin modulates the bias voltage directly and measures the modulated current signal on ADC0. No extra cabling has to be installed. It is still possible to switch between the internal lockin and an external one whose output has to be connected to ADC1(ADC2).

The internal lockin measures both the signal at the modulation frequency and the second harmonic.

[[File:Cliplockin.png]]

The parameters:

'''Frequency:'''
Modulation frequency

'''Amplitude:'''
Peak to Peak modulation amplitude

'''Ref. Amplitude:'''
Peak to Peak amplitude of the external reference signal supplied by DAC4. (Discontinued under AFM Operation)

'''RC:'''
Time constant of the lock-in low pass filter

'''Phase1, Phase2:'''
Phase value for first and second harmonic

'''Lockin-Mode:'''

[[File:Cliplockinmode.png]]

Internal Off (External): The internal lockin is switched off. The modulation has to be taken from an external lockin. Connect the dI/dV signal to channel ADC1 and the d2I/dV2 to ADC2.

Internal: Modulation and Signal detection done by the internal lockin. The signal is extracted from the current signal (ADC0).

Internal + Scan off: Internal Lockin Mode but the modulation is switched off during scanning

Internal + Spectrum only: The modulation is applied only during spectroscopy

External + Internal Ref.on DAC 5: The modulation is done by the internal lockin, but lockin detection is performed by the external lockin. A reference signal for the external lockin is supplied by DAC 5. Connect the dI/dV signal to channel ADC1 and the d2I/dV2 to ADC2.

Output Channel:
Determines the output channel of the Lockin. (BiasVoltage, PLL df and Ampl, Z)

Lockin-Channel: Determines the input channel of the Lockin (ADC0-3, df Z(DAC0))

2F: Enables 2nd harmonic mode

== Panel ==

Sensors
On Panel additional information is available, regarding the temperature sensors etc.

Memo
The memo field is used to input extra information about the current image. The memo info is stored with the image.

[[File:Clippanel.png]]

== Info ==

Lists all paramter sets.

Load,Save
Press to load or save the selected parameter set.

Info
Use the info field to input information which should be later available, but not contained in any other datafile etc.
The contents of the info field is saved in info.cfg. Double clicking in the info field, will insert an actual time stamp.

[[File:Clipinfo.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

Parameter

2016-12-21T09:08:03Z

Ltspm: /* Scan */

== Scan ==
The position of the tip (x,y,z) is controlled by three 20bit D/A converters. Range ( -524288 .. +524287 corresponding to –10V to +10V).The orientation is chosen in the following way: negative X Values are located on the left side of the image, positive Y values are located at the bottom of the image. The origin of the image is without additional offset values at point (0,0). This corresponds to the point in the Y top and X-center of the image. (The origin of the image can be changed using the setxyoffset – command, which changes the OffsetX,Y values).
The size of the image is defined by the distance between the image points in DAC units (Delta X,Y) and the number of image points. The corresponding size of the image is in Angström: DeltaX*NumX/(524287)*10V* GainX*XPIEZOCONST[A/V] (similar to Y, Z). T
Size, Speed, Pixelnumber(with certain limitations) can be changed during scanning. Top-down and Bottom-Up scanning is supported.

Scan operation is controlled by the following parameters:

'''Image Size(Pixel):'''
Input the number of pixels of the image to be acquired. X is the value of the horizontal scan direction.

'''Image Size(A):'''
Input the size of the image [Å]. It is important that the Piezo-Sensitivity factors have been correctly chosen. The deflection sensitivity is temperature dependent!

'''Scanning Speed[A/sec]:'''
Value of the scanning speed [Å/s]. Input values will be adjusted regarding to hardware restrictions. For higher speeds larger internal step sizes will be chosen. Also the time it takes for a single line (only forward direction time) and the time to take a complete image are displayed.

'''Biasvoltage[V]:'''
Input of tunneling bias voltage [V]. The bias voltage value can be also changed with the Voltage - Slider. The Bias-Polarity can be switched by pressing the ''+'' or ''-'' Keys or by mouse clicking on the '+V' or '-V' - Label at the voltage - slider.

'''Rotation[Deg]:'''
Rotation of the scanning direction in degree. Rotation is around the center point in the top image scan line (0,0 point)

'''Rot_center:'''
If checked the rotation is done around the image center.

'''Channels:'''
Select the channels which will be measured during a scan operation.

'''I-Preamp Gain:'''
Select the gain of the gain switchable current preamplifier. The value is the base 10 logarithm of the gain in [Å/V].

'''Constant Current - Constant Height:'''
Select either scanning in normal constant current or in constant height mode. In constant height mode the topography signal is automatically substituted by the current signal.

'''Forward - Backward Scandirection:'''
Normally data is taken only when scanning from left to right. If forward+backward is selected then data is acquired in both directions. As an example if only one channel is active the uneven lines are taken from left to right and the even lines are taken from right to left.

'''Multivoltage:'''
Another option is the multiple voltages mode. In this mode a series of images are taken in parallel line by line, while for each image a different bias voltage is applied. The different bias voltages are taken from the neighboring MultiVolt table. Only the voltages up to the first voltage which is equal to zero are used up to a maximum of 6 voltages. The individual images are saved in the same file and appear in one single image window

'''PlanDX, PlanDY:'''
An average tilt of the sample can be compensated by using these parameters. The user can input these parameters manually or use the automatic feature. This is done the following way. Take an image. Use the <Pln> Button and input 3 points to subtract a plane. Then select the Set_Plan_DX_DY feature under the DSP item in the main menu. It is important to realize that thermal drift or piezo creep will significantly disturb the Plan_DY value. To improve that you could take an image rotated by 90deg and follow the above procedure. This will give you a better Plan_DY value, but less precise Plan_DX value. Combination of both allow you to both values with higher precision. Important: Check the new values, especially before you take a constant height image.

'''Offset_X,Offset_Y:'''
The X,Y offset voltages of the origin of the image. Double Click the Offset_X Label to switch between [V] and [Å] units

'''Repeat Control:'''
Use these parameters to acquire image series with precise timing.

'''Count:''' The number of images to be taken.

'''Interval:''' Select the time interval [s] when a new image scan is started. (must be larger then the time to acquire a single image)

The files are automatically saved with the file extension R.DAT

'''Const. Height Z-Offset, Preamp gain, Bias Voltage: '''
In constant height mode different values for the Preamp Gain and the Biasvoltage can be applied.
In constant height mode scanning Zoffset determines an additional perpendicular shift of the tip after the feedback loop has been switched off.

'''Piezoconstants:'''
These are calibration constants to determine the piezo sensitivity [Å/V]. Be aware that these parameters are temperature dependant.

'''HV_Gain:'''
Displays the gain of the x,y,z channels of the Createc HV Amplifier

[[file:clipscan.png]]

== DSP ==
The digital feedback controller is operated by the following parameters.

'''FB-Mode:'''
Select whether the current signal from the FB Channel is applied directly to the digital feedback controller (Lin(I)), or the logarithm of the signal (Log(I)) or the absolute value (Abs(I)) is calculated first.

'''FB-Channel:'''
Here the value of the channel can be selected which is used as input signal of the Feedback Loop controller.

SetPoint[A or Hz]:
Setpoint value of the current or df signal.

'''Integrator-RC:'''
This value sets the response time of the integrator part of the PI controller. Only the integrator part is usually installed.

'''P-Gain:'''
This value sets the proportional part of the PI controller.

'''Current Low Pass[Hz]:'''
The current signal from ADC0 can be recorded during scanning. Before the signal is stored on the PC the signal is low pass filtered. The edge frequency of this low pass filter can be set by this parameter.

'''Integrator and P-Gain Slider:'''
The Integration and P-Gain values can be continuously modified using the two sliders. The original values input manually in the text boxes can be changed by 0.1 - 10.0 by slider movement. Both values can be changed during scan operation to optimize feedback operation.

[[file:clipDSP.png]]

== Tip Forming ==
Tip forming (controlled crashing of the tip) is similar to the vertical manipulation procedure, but uses independent parameters to simplify the intermittent use of tip forming and vertical manipulation/spectroscopy. Tip forming is performed by first pressing on the tip forming button <TF> and then marking a particular point in the image by clicking with the left mouse button. Similar to vertical manipulation the data taken during the tip formation are displayed in the vertical manipulation form. The parameters used are TipForm_Vol, which is the voltage applied to the sample during the tip forming process. Then TipForm_Z [mV] , which means that the tip is moved towards the sample by Z x Zpiezoconst for the tip forming. (The gain of the z - HV amplifier is automatically included). The preamplifier gain is always set to gain 106.

'''Voltage[V]'''
Voltage applied during the tip forming manipulation process.

'''Z-Approach'''
Defines how far the tip moves towards the sample during a tip forming process

'''Pulslength[sec]'''
Defines how long a complete tip forming approach takes.

'''Lateral Speed[A/sec]'''
Defines how fast the tip moves to the selected tip contact position

[[file:cliptipform.png]]

== Lockin ==

The new version of STMAFM has an internal lockin integrated in the DSP software. The internal lockin modulates the bias voltage directly and measures the modulated current signal on ADC0. No extra cabling has to be installed. It is still possible to switch between the internal lockin and an external one whose output has to be connected to ADC1(ADC2).

The internal lockin measures both the signal at the modulation frequency and the second harmonic.

[[File:Cliplockin.png]]

The parameters:

'''Frequency:'''
Modulation frequency

'''Amplitude:'''
Peak to Peak modulation amplitude

'''Ref. Amplitude:'''
Peak to Peak amplitude of the external reference signal supplied by DAC4. (Discontinued under AFM Operation)

'''RC:'''
Time constant of the lock-in low pass filter

'''Phase1, Phase2:'''
Phase value for first and second harmonic

'''Lockin-Mode:'''

[[File:Cliplockinmode.png]]

Internal Off (External): The internal lockin is switched off. The modulation has to be taken from an external lockin. Connect the dI/dV signal to channel ADC1 and the d2I/dV2 to ADC2.

Internal: Modulation and Signal detection done by the internal lockin. The signal is extracted from the current signal (ADC0).

Internal + Scan off: Internal Lockin Mode but the modulation is switched off during scanning

Internal + Spectrum only: The modulation is applied only during spectroscopy

External + Internal Ref.on DAC 5: The modulation is done by the internal lockin, but lockin detection is performed by the external lockin. A reference signal for the external lockin is supplied by DAC 5. Connect the dI/dV signal to channel ADC1 and the d2I/dV2 to ADC2.

Output Channel:
Determines the output channel of the Lockin. (BiasVoltage, PLL df and Ampl, Z)

Lockin-Channel: Determines the input channel of the Lockin (ADC0-3, df Z(DAC0))

2F: Enables 2nd harmonic mode

== Panel ==

Sensors
On Panel additional information is available, regarding the temperature sensors etc.

Memo
The memo field is used to input extra information about the current image. The memo info is stored with the image.

[[File:Clippanel.png]]

== Info ==

Lists all paramter sets.

Load,Save
Press to load or save the selected parameter set.

Info
Use the info field to input information which should be later available, but not contained in any other datafile etc.
The contents of the info field is saved in info.cfg. Double clicking in the info field, will insert an actual time stamp.

[[File:Clipinfo.png]]

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Main

2016-12-21T08:55:27Z

Ltspm: /* Main Buttons */

== Main Form ==
The STMAFM form contains the main control elements of the software. Below the menu bar several control the data acquisition and analysis of the STM data.

To take a new image press the ''START'' button. To stop press the ''STOP'' button. When a new scan is started a default filename is assigned to the image. It consists of the date and time, when the scan was started. Its extension will be '.dat'. A single letter is put in the front of the name, which is used to indicate the machine name. (Example:' A020124.190937.dat' ). To save the file either press the ''QSAVE'' button which saves the file in the current directory, indicated in the status line at the bottom of the window, or use the menu command ''Save *.dat'' under ''File''. As long as the files has not been saved a ' * ' is attached to the file. ''Copy'' copies the data in the left image to the second image on the right.

The basic operations to display the data are done using the following buttons:

''DA'': Display the image using different line by line subtraction modes
''DX'': Display the image using automatic plane substraction
''DP'': Display the image using plane substraction
''LA'': Display image in DA mode and perform automatic scaling
''LP'': Perform a low pass filter operation
''HP'': Perform a high pass filter operation
''Pln'': Input 3 points (with the mouse) to determine the plane for plane background subtraction
''Lin'': Calculate a linescan along a line between 2 points
''LM'' Lateral manipulation
''VM'' Vertical manipulation of I/V spectroscopy
''TF'' Tip forming

Use ''Disp LinePlan Quad'' under ''Display'' in the menu subtract to perform an automatic line/plane subtraction using also quadratic terms
Below the buttons you find the Palette window, which displays the current 8bit palette. Use the left mouse button to switch between different standard palettes. Using the right mouse button will open a popup menu with additional options to create a user defined palette or to load and save externally defined palettes.

The small list box on the right is used for communication between different instances of the STMAFM program. If the instance of the program which is in data acquisition mode saves a file then this filename is send to all other instances of the program running in analysis mode.

Below the buttons the screen is separated in two parts, divided by an horizontaly movable slider. On the left is always the image of the current data file displayed. All the operations like scanning and image processing are done in this part on the window. On the right usually a list of all loaded files is displayed. A small icon image and some info is shown for each file. The two modes to display these data are 'Report" and 'Icon' view. The modes can be selected under menu item 'Display'. When in Report view pressing on the 'Image' bar will switch the way how the info is displayed. The list view can be suppressed by selecting 'Image2' under menu item 'Display' and the second image is displayed instead.

On the bottom of the window a status bar is located. It shows the current date and time, some status info about the scanning status, the mouse position on the image,the size of the image, the current default directory, the available space of disk storage.

[[file:clipstmafm.png|600px]]

== Menu Structure ==

'''File'''
Open *.DAT Open STMAFM DataFile
Save *.DAT Save STMAFM DataFile
QuickSave Save STMAFM DataFile in active directory

Export File
Save *.BMP Save Image as BMP-File
Save *.JPG Save as JPEG File
SaveEMF *.EMF Save Image in EMF Format
SaveAscii *.ASC Save Image-Data in ASCII Format

Import File
Load *.BMP Load BMP File
Load *.TIF Load TIF File

Print
Print Image Print the image
Print Listview Print the Filelist in Listview
Printer Setup Select the printer

Special
Compress Files All Files are saved using Data compression with Zlib
Save Listview-Files Save List of Files in the Listview window
Autosave *.bak Save all recorded images
AutoSave All Save all images
DOS-CommandLine Open a DOS-Window
HPData Get Data from Agilent Datalogger
Get_SRS_Lockin_Val Get External Lockin Setup Parameters

STMAFM-Analysis Start another copy of the STMAFM-Program
Exit Exit the STMAFM-Program
About About
ReOpen Opens the last file

Edit
Copy Clipbd Copy the image to the clipboard
Copy Dataimage2 Copy left image to the right
Copy Clipbd EMF Copy the image to the clipboard in EMF Format with Info
Copy New Window Copy the image into new form
Copy Overview Copy the image into the overview form
Copy Palette to Clipbd Copy the palette to the Clipboard

Scan
Scan Start Start the Scan
Scan Stop Stop the Scan
Enable/Start RepeatTimer Start the Repeat-Timer
Preamplifier Select the preamplifier
Preamp_Femto_LowNoise Select for Femto Preamp in Low Noise Mode
Preamp_Femto_HighSpeed Select for Femto Preamp in High Speed Mode
Preamp_Femto_100G Select for Femto Preamp with fixed gain 10^11
Preamp_UserType Select for User specific Preamp

Autofilesave Save every image
Autorepeat Start a new image automatically
Autodispreset Clear the image window when starting a new scan

Show Scanline Marker Display a red line at the actual scan line position
Display current Scan Profile Display the current line as a line scan in a separate window

Scan_Y_Direction Select the Scandirection (Top-Bottom,Bottom-Top,etc)
ScanCoarse Check to set scanning by Coarse Piezos otherwise the main Piezo is used

DSP
Lateral Manip. Lateral Manipulation
Vertical Manip. Vertical Manipulation
Tip Forming Tip Forming

SetXYOffset - Top Set the xy-offset for the new top site
SetXYOffset - Center Set the xy-offset for the new center site
SetXYOffset - Zoom Set the xy-offset for the new center site
ResetXYOffset Set the xy-offset to (0,0)
Copy Offset from Param Copy the xy-offset values from the scanparameterlist
1: Offsetx,y: 0 0 Select as new Offset
2: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
3: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
4: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
Set_Plan_Dx_Dy Set the parameters for the plan-offset.
Set_DSP_Clock Change the Clock-Frequency of the DSP-FeedBack-Loop

Image
Undo Filter Undo last image operation
Filter
LowPass Low Pass Filter the image
HighPass High Pass Filter the image
Laplace Laplace Filter the image
Median Median Filter
Edge(Horz) Edge Filter in the horizontal direction
Invert Invert the image
Imagedata * 10 The image data is multiplied by a factor of 10
Imagedata / 10 The image data is divided by a factor of 10

Resize
Zoom_Up_Rect Zoom up a selected rectangle
Resize / 2 Resize the image
Resize x 2 Resize the image
Interpolation / 2 Interpolate the image
Interpolation x 2 Interpolate the image

Rotate90deg

FFT
FFT2D Fast Fourier Transform
FFT2D Invers Inverse FFT
FFT2d Cutout Cutout a part of the FFT
FFT Evaluate Open FFT Evaluate window

Image Analysis
Histogram Show the histogram of the image
Areacalculation Calculate the size of islands
Islandsize Calculate the size of islands

Display
Zoom
100%
200%
300%
400%

ListView
Report Show files as icons and info
Icon Show files as icons only
Image2 Show Image2 and not the Listviewbox
ListViewBox enabled Enables the ListView Box
AutoclearList Clear the Listviewbox before new a new list is added
Largeiconsize=64-256 Icon size of the images in the listviewbox
Load Icon Plan Load the icons using image plan subtraction
Clear Listview Clear the ListView

DispCommands
DispAuto Display image using linear line background subtraction
DispPlanAuto Display image using auto plan background subtraction
DispPlan Display image using plan subtraction
Last Disp Autoscale Display with automatic scaling
Plan Auto Subtract Like Displanauto + subtract plane from image data
Linescan Linescan in the image
Plan2dinput Input 3 points to select the background subtraction plane
Configuration
DACunits Select DAC units
nm-Units [A] Select Angström units
Display Image in Lines Select to display image in line and not gray scale mode
Disp LinePlan Quad Select to perform lin.+quad. Backgroundsubtraction
Disp Plan and Subtract If selected Disp Plan subtracts the plane from the image data
Disp Automode Offset/Slope DA Mode subtract offset and slope line by line
Disp Automode Offset DA Mode subtract offset line by line
Disp Automode None DA Mode subtract offset of first line
Disp Automode Diff DA Mode differentiate image data line by line

Forms
Parameter
Lat.Manip Show the Latmanip window
Vert.Manip Show the Vertmanip. window
Time Spectrum Show the Time Spectrum window
AFM Show the AFM PLL window
Ramp-Controller Start Ramp Controller
New Channelform Open another Channelform
Linescan Show the linescan window
Draw Grid Show Grid window
3dView Show 3d View window
Memo Show separate Memo window
Overview Show the overview window
Slider Show the Slider window
User Form Show the User Form
Reset Form Positions Position all windows at (top,left) = (0,0)
Show/Hide Old Param Show/Hide the old Parameter window

Debug
Reset Scanstatus Enable all buttons again
Remote Open Remote window
Client Server Control Open Client Server Control
FIFO_COM USB2.0 Shows whether communication is by USB2.0 Hardware
Build Testimage Build a new image without scanning
STM Simulation Run the STM Programm in Simulation Mode (with DSP)
PLL Off Switch PLL off
Debug Messages On Show Debug messages
Block Data Transfer Transfer Data after Acquitstion has been done
ADDA DSP Connect Manually start/stop communication between DSP and ADDA
Form Memory Watch Shows some status data

Tools
Tip-Etching Open to etch STM tips
Initialization Open Initialization window
Data Recorder Open Datarecorder window
Flash Utility Utility to burn Flash on DSP Board with new DSP software

Help
Show STMAFM-Manual Show STMAFM Manual (PDF)

== Main Buttons ==
''Start'' or ''F1'': Start the scan

''Stop'' or ''F2'': Stop the scan

''Qsave'' or ''F3'': Automatically saves an image in the actual directory

''Copy'' or ''F4'': Copy Image1 to Image2

''LM'' or ''F5'': Perform a lateral manipulation

''VM'' or ''F6'': Perform a vertical manipulation or spectroscopy

''TF'' or ''F8'': Perform tip forming

''DA'' or ''F9'': Display the image with automatic line by line background subtraction

''DX'' or ''F10'': Display the image with automatic plane background subtraction

''DP'' or ''F11'': Display the image with planar background subtraction with predefined parameters

''LA'' or ''F12'': Display the image with automatic greyscale scaling

''LP'' or ''Shift F9'': Low pass filter

''HP'' or ''Shift F10'': High pass filter

''PLN'' or ''Shift F11'': Input 3 points for the plane used in plane background subtraction

''LIN'' or ''Shift F12'': Display a linear scan between two points on the image

== ==
[[category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Main

2016-12-21T08:54:37Z

Ltspm: /* Main Buttons */

== Main Form ==
The STMAFM form contains the main control elements of the software. Below the menu bar several control the data acquisition and analysis of the STM data.

To take a new image press the ''START'' button. To stop press the ''STOP'' button. When a new scan is started a default filename is assigned to the image. It consists of the date and time, when the scan was started. Its extension will be '.dat'. A single letter is put in the front of the name, which is used to indicate the machine name. (Example:' A020124.190937.dat' ). To save the file either press the ''QSAVE'' button which saves the file in the current directory, indicated in the status line at the bottom of the window, or use the menu command ''Save *.dat'' under ''File''. As long as the files has not been saved a ' * ' is attached to the file. ''Copy'' copies the data in the left image to the second image on the right.

The basic operations to display the data are done using the following buttons:

''DA'': Display the image using different line by line subtraction modes
''DX'': Display the image using automatic plane substraction
''DP'': Display the image using plane substraction
''LA'': Display image in DA mode and perform automatic scaling
''LP'': Perform a low pass filter operation
''HP'': Perform a high pass filter operation
''Pln'': Input 3 points (with the mouse) to determine the plane for plane background subtraction
''Lin'': Calculate a linescan along a line between 2 points
''LM'' Lateral manipulation
''VM'' Vertical manipulation of I/V spectroscopy
''TF'' Tip forming

Use ''Disp LinePlan Quad'' under ''Display'' in the menu subtract to perform an automatic line/plane subtraction using also quadratic terms
Below the buttons you find the Palette window, which displays the current 8bit palette. Use the left mouse button to switch between different standard palettes. Using the right mouse button will open a popup menu with additional options to create a user defined palette or to load and save externally defined palettes.

The small list box on the right is used for communication between different instances of the STMAFM program. If the instance of the program which is in data acquisition mode saves a file then this filename is send to all other instances of the program running in analysis mode.

Below the buttons the screen is separated in two parts, divided by an horizontaly movable slider. On the left is always the image of the current data file displayed. All the operations like scanning and image processing are done in this part on the window. On the right usually a list of all loaded files is displayed. A small icon image and some info is shown for each file. The two modes to display these data are 'Report" and 'Icon' view. The modes can be selected under menu item 'Display'. When in Report view pressing on the 'Image' bar will switch the way how the info is displayed. The list view can be suppressed by selecting 'Image2' under menu item 'Display' and the second image is displayed instead.

On the bottom of the window a status bar is located. It shows the current date and time, some status info about the scanning status, the mouse position on the image,the size of the image, the current default directory, the available space of disk storage.

[[file:clipstmafm.png|600px]]

== Menu Structure ==

'''File'''
Open *.DAT Open STMAFM DataFile
Save *.DAT Save STMAFM DataFile
QuickSave Save STMAFM DataFile in active directory

Export File
Save *.BMP Save Image as BMP-File
Save *.JPG Save as JPEG File
SaveEMF *.EMF Save Image in EMF Format
SaveAscii *.ASC Save Image-Data in ASCII Format

Import File
Load *.BMP Load BMP File
Load *.TIF Load TIF File

Print
Print Image Print the image
Print Listview Print the Filelist in Listview
Printer Setup Select the printer

Special
Compress Files All Files are saved using Data compression with Zlib
Save Listview-Files Save List of Files in the Listview window
Autosave *.bak Save all recorded images
AutoSave All Save all images
DOS-CommandLine Open a DOS-Window
HPData Get Data from Agilent Datalogger
Get_SRS_Lockin_Val Get External Lockin Setup Parameters

STMAFM-Analysis Start another copy of the STMAFM-Program
Exit Exit the STMAFM-Program
About About
ReOpen Opens the last file

Edit
Copy Clipbd Copy the image to the clipboard
Copy Dataimage2 Copy left image to the right
Copy Clipbd EMF Copy the image to the clipboard in EMF Format with Info
Copy New Window Copy the image into new form
Copy Overview Copy the image into the overview form
Copy Palette to Clipbd Copy the palette to the Clipboard

Scan
Scan Start Start the Scan
Scan Stop Stop the Scan
Enable/Start RepeatTimer Start the Repeat-Timer
Preamplifier Select the preamplifier
Preamp_Femto_LowNoise Select for Femto Preamp in Low Noise Mode
Preamp_Femto_HighSpeed Select for Femto Preamp in High Speed Mode
Preamp_Femto_100G Select for Femto Preamp with fixed gain 10^11
Preamp_UserType Select for User specific Preamp

Autofilesave Save every image
Autorepeat Start a new image automatically
Autodispreset Clear the image window when starting a new scan

Show Scanline Marker Display a red line at the actual scan line position
Display current Scan Profile Display the current line as a line scan in a separate window

Scan_Y_Direction Select the Scandirection (Top-Bottom,Bottom-Top,etc)
ScanCoarse Check to set scanning by Coarse Piezos otherwise the main Piezo is used

DSP
Lateral Manip. Lateral Manipulation
Vertical Manip. Vertical Manipulation
Tip Forming Tip Forming

SetXYOffset - Top Set the xy-offset for the new top site
SetXYOffset - Center Set the xy-offset for the new center site
SetXYOffset - Zoom Set the xy-offset for the new center site
ResetXYOffset Set the xy-offset to (0,0)
Copy Offset from Param Copy the xy-offset values from the scanparameterlist
1: Offsetx,y: 0 0 Select as new Offset
2: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
3: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
4: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
Set_Plan_Dx_Dy Set the parameters for the plan-offset.
Set_DSP_Clock Change the Clock-Frequency of the DSP-FeedBack-Loop

Image
Undo Filter Undo last image operation
Filter
LowPass Low Pass Filter the image
HighPass High Pass Filter the image
Laplace Laplace Filter the image
Median Median Filter
Edge(Horz) Edge Filter in the horizontal direction
Invert Invert the image
Imagedata * 10 The image data is multiplied by a factor of 10
Imagedata / 10 The image data is divided by a factor of 10

Resize
Zoom_Up_Rect Zoom up a selected rectangle
Resize / 2 Resize the image
Resize x 2 Resize the image
Interpolation / 2 Interpolate the image
Interpolation x 2 Interpolate the image

Rotate90deg

FFT
FFT2D Fast Fourier Transform
FFT2D Invers Inverse FFT
FFT2d Cutout Cutout a part of the FFT
FFT Evaluate Open FFT Evaluate window

Image Analysis
Histogram Show the histogram of the image
Areacalculation Calculate the size of islands
Islandsize Calculate the size of islands

Display
Zoom
100%
200%
300%
400%

ListView
Report Show files as icons and info
Icon Show files as icons only
Image2 Show Image2 and not the Listviewbox
ListViewBox enabled Enables the ListView Box
AutoclearList Clear the Listviewbox before new a new list is added
Largeiconsize=64-256 Icon size of the images in the listviewbox
Load Icon Plan Load the icons using image plan subtraction
Clear Listview Clear the ListView

DispCommands
DispAuto Display image using linear line background subtraction
DispPlanAuto Display image using auto plan background subtraction
DispPlan Display image using plan subtraction
Last Disp Autoscale Display with automatic scaling
Plan Auto Subtract Like Displanauto + subtract plane from image data
Linescan Linescan in the image
Plan2dinput Input 3 points to select the background subtraction plane
Configuration
DACunits Select DAC units
nm-Units [A] Select Angström units
Display Image in Lines Select to display image in line and not gray scale mode
Disp LinePlan Quad Select to perform lin.+quad. Backgroundsubtraction
Disp Plan and Subtract If selected Disp Plan subtracts the plane from the image data
Disp Automode Offset/Slope DA Mode subtract offset and slope line by line
Disp Automode Offset DA Mode subtract offset line by line
Disp Automode None DA Mode subtract offset of first line
Disp Automode Diff DA Mode differentiate image data line by line

Forms
Parameter
Lat.Manip Show the Latmanip window
Vert.Manip Show the Vertmanip. window
Time Spectrum Show the Time Spectrum window
AFM Show the AFM PLL window
Ramp-Controller Start Ramp Controller
New Channelform Open another Channelform
Linescan Show the linescan window
Draw Grid Show Grid window
3dView Show 3d View window
Memo Show separate Memo window
Overview Show the overview window
Slider Show the Slider window
User Form Show the User Form
Reset Form Positions Position all windows at (top,left) = (0,0)
Show/Hide Old Param Show/Hide the old Parameter window

Debug
Reset Scanstatus Enable all buttons again
Remote Open Remote window
Client Server Control Open Client Server Control
FIFO_COM USB2.0 Shows whether communication is by USB2.0 Hardware
Build Testimage Build a new image without scanning
STM Simulation Run the STM Programm in Simulation Mode (with DSP)
PLL Off Switch PLL off
Debug Messages On Show Debug messages
Block Data Transfer Transfer Data after Acquitstion has been done
ADDA DSP Connect Manually start/stop communication between DSP and ADDA
Form Memory Watch Shows some status data

Tools
Tip-Etching Open to etch STM tips
Initialization Open Initialization window
Data Recorder Open Datarecorder window
Flash Utility Utility to burn Flash on DSP Board with new DSP software

Help
Show STMAFM-Manual Show STMAFM Manual (PDF)

== Main Buttons ==
''Start'' or ''F1'': Start the scan

''Stop'' or ''F2'': Stop the scan

''Qsave'' or ''F3'': Automatically saves an image in the actual directory

''Copy'' or ''F4'': Copy Image1 to Image2

''LM'' or ''F5'': Perform a lateral manipulation

''VM'' or ''F6'': Perform a vertical manipulation or spectroscopy

''TF'' or ''F8'': Perform tip forming

''DA'' or ''F9'': Display the image with automatic line by line background subtraction

''DX'' or ''F10'': Display the image with automatic plane background subtraction

''DP'' or ''F11'': Display the image with planar background subtraction with predefined parameters

''LA'' or ''F12'': Display the image with automatic greyscale scaling

''LP'' or ''Shift F9'': Low pass filter

<HP> or ''Shift F10'': High pass filter

<PLN> or ''Shift F11'': Input 3 points for the plane used in plane background subtraction

<LIN> or ''Shift F12'': Display a linear scan between two points on the image

== ==
[[category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Main

2016-12-21T08:49:37Z

Ltspm: /* Main Form */

== Main Form ==
The STMAFM form contains the main control elements of the software. Below the menu bar several control the data acquisition and analysis of the STM data.

To take a new image press the ''START'' button. To stop press the ''STOP'' button. When a new scan is started a default filename is assigned to the image. It consists of the date and time, when the scan was started. Its extension will be '.dat'. A single letter is put in the front of the name, which is used to indicate the machine name. (Example:' A020124.190937.dat' ). To save the file either press the ''QSAVE'' button which saves the file in the current directory, indicated in the status line at the bottom of the window, or use the menu command ''Save *.dat'' under ''File''. As long as the files has not been saved a ' * ' is attached to the file. ''Copy'' copies the data in the left image to the second image on the right.

The basic operations to display the data are done using the following buttons:

''DA'': Display the image using different line by line subtraction modes
''DX'': Display the image using automatic plane substraction
''DP'': Display the image using plane substraction
''LA'': Display image in DA mode and perform automatic scaling
''LP'': Perform a low pass filter operation
''HP'': Perform a high pass filter operation
''Pln'': Input 3 points (with the mouse) to determine the plane for plane background subtraction
''Lin'': Calculate a linescan along a line between 2 points
''LM'' Lateral manipulation
''VM'' Vertical manipulation of I/V spectroscopy
''TF'' Tip forming

Use ''Disp LinePlan Quad'' under ''Display'' in the menu subtract to perform an automatic line/plane subtraction using also quadratic terms
Below the buttons you find the Palette window, which displays the current 8bit palette. Use the left mouse button to switch between different standard palettes. Using the right mouse button will open a popup menu with additional options to create a user defined palette or to load and save externally defined palettes.

The small list box on the right is used for communication between different instances of the STMAFM program. If the instance of the program which is in data acquisition mode saves a file then this filename is send to all other instances of the program running in analysis mode.

Below the buttons the screen is separated in two parts, divided by an horizontaly movable slider. On the left is always the image of the current data file displayed. All the operations like scanning and image processing are done in this part on the window. On the right usually a list of all loaded files is displayed. A small icon image and some info is shown for each file. The two modes to display these data are 'Report" and 'Icon' view. The modes can be selected under menu item 'Display'. When in Report view pressing on the 'Image' bar will switch the way how the info is displayed. The list view can be suppressed by selecting 'Image2' under menu item 'Display' and the second image is displayed instead.

On the bottom of the window a status bar is located. It shows the current date and time, some status info about the scanning status, the mouse position on the image,the size of the image, the current default directory, the available space of disk storage.

[[file:clipstmafm.png|600px]]

== Menu Structure ==

'''File'''
Open *.DAT Open STMAFM DataFile
Save *.DAT Save STMAFM DataFile
QuickSave Save STMAFM DataFile in active directory

Export File
Save *.BMP Save Image as BMP-File
Save *.JPG Save as JPEG File
SaveEMF *.EMF Save Image in EMF Format
SaveAscii *.ASC Save Image-Data in ASCII Format

Import File
Load *.BMP Load BMP File
Load *.TIF Load TIF File

Print
Print Image Print the image
Print Listview Print the Filelist in Listview
Printer Setup Select the printer

Special
Compress Files All Files are saved using Data compression with Zlib
Save Listview-Files Save List of Files in the Listview window
Autosave *.bak Save all recorded images
AutoSave All Save all images
DOS-CommandLine Open a DOS-Window
HPData Get Data from Agilent Datalogger
Get_SRS_Lockin_Val Get External Lockin Setup Parameters

STMAFM-Analysis Start another copy of the STMAFM-Program
Exit Exit the STMAFM-Program
About About
ReOpen Opens the last file

Edit
Copy Clipbd Copy the image to the clipboard
Copy Dataimage2 Copy left image to the right
Copy Clipbd EMF Copy the image to the clipboard in EMF Format with Info
Copy New Window Copy the image into new form
Copy Overview Copy the image into the overview form
Copy Palette to Clipbd Copy the palette to the Clipboard

Scan
Scan Start Start the Scan
Scan Stop Stop the Scan
Enable/Start RepeatTimer Start the Repeat-Timer
Preamplifier Select the preamplifier
Preamp_Femto_LowNoise Select for Femto Preamp in Low Noise Mode
Preamp_Femto_HighSpeed Select for Femto Preamp in High Speed Mode
Preamp_Femto_100G Select for Femto Preamp with fixed gain 10^11
Preamp_UserType Select for User specific Preamp

Autofilesave Save every image
Autorepeat Start a new image automatically
Autodispreset Clear the image window when starting a new scan

Show Scanline Marker Display a red line at the actual scan line position
Display current Scan Profile Display the current line as a line scan in a separate window

Scan_Y_Direction Select the Scandirection (Top-Bottom,Bottom-Top,etc)
ScanCoarse Check to set scanning by Coarse Piezos otherwise the main Piezo is used

DSP
Lateral Manip. Lateral Manipulation
Vertical Manip. Vertical Manipulation
Tip Forming Tip Forming

SetXYOffset - Top Set the xy-offset for the new top site
SetXYOffset - Center Set the xy-offset for the new center site
SetXYOffset - Zoom Set the xy-offset for the new center site
ResetXYOffset Set the xy-offset to (0,0)
Copy Offset from Param Copy the xy-offset values from the scanparameterlist
1: Offsetx,y: 0 0 Select as new Offset
2: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
3: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
4: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
Set_Plan_Dx_Dy Set the parameters for the plan-offset.
Set_DSP_Clock Change the Clock-Frequency of the DSP-FeedBack-Loop

Image
Undo Filter Undo last image operation
Filter
LowPass Low Pass Filter the image
HighPass High Pass Filter the image
Laplace Laplace Filter the image
Median Median Filter
Edge(Horz) Edge Filter in the horizontal direction
Invert Invert the image
Imagedata * 10 The image data is multiplied by a factor of 10
Imagedata / 10 The image data is divided by a factor of 10

Resize
Zoom_Up_Rect Zoom up a selected rectangle
Resize / 2 Resize the image
Resize x 2 Resize the image
Interpolation / 2 Interpolate the image
Interpolation x 2 Interpolate the image

Rotate90deg

FFT
FFT2D Fast Fourier Transform
FFT2D Invers Inverse FFT
FFT2d Cutout Cutout a part of the FFT
FFT Evaluate Open FFT Evaluate window

Image Analysis
Histogram Show the histogram of the image
Areacalculation Calculate the size of islands
Islandsize Calculate the size of islands

Display
Zoom
100%
200%
300%
400%

ListView
Report Show files as icons and info
Icon Show files as icons only
Image2 Show Image2 and not the Listviewbox
ListViewBox enabled Enables the ListView Box
AutoclearList Clear the Listviewbox before new a new list is added
Largeiconsize=64-256 Icon size of the images in the listviewbox
Load Icon Plan Load the icons using image plan subtraction
Clear Listview Clear the ListView

DispCommands
DispAuto Display image using linear line background subtraction
DispPlanAuto Display image using auto plan background subtraction
DispPlan Display image using plan subtraction
Last Disp Autoscale Display with automatic scaling
Plan Auto Subtract Like Displanauto + subtract plane from image data
Linescan Linescan in the image
Plan2dinput Input 3 points to select the background subtraction plane
Configuration
DACunits Select DAC units
nm-Units [A] Select Angström units
Display Image in Lines Select to display image in line and not gray scale mode
Disp LinePlan Quad Select to perform lin.+quad. Backgroundsubtraction
Disp Plan and Subtract If selected Disp Plan subtracts the plane from the image data
Disp Automode Offset/Slope DA Mode subtract offset and slope line by line
Disp Automode Offset DA Mode subtract offset line by line
Disp Automode None DA Mode subtract offset of first line
Disp Automode Diff DA Mode differentiate image data line by line

Forms
Parameter
Lat.Manip Show the Latmanip window
Vert.Manip Show the Vertmanip. window
Time Spectrum Show the Time Spectrum window
AFM Show the AFM PLL window
Ramp-Controller Start Ramp Controller
New Channelform Open another Channelform
Linescan Show the linescan window
Draw Grid Show Grid window
3dView Show 3d View window
Memo Show separate Memo window
Overview Show the overview window
Slider Show the Slider window
User Form Show the User Form
Reset Form Positions Position all windows at (top,left) = (0,0)
Show/Hide Old Param Show/Hide the old Parameter window

Debug
Reset Scanstatus Enable all buttons again
Remote Open Remote window
Client Server Control Open Client Server Control
FIFO_COM USB2.0 Shows whether communication is by USB2.0 Hardware
Build Testimage Build a new image without scanning
STM Simulation Run the STM Programm in Simulation Mode (with DSP)
PLL Off Switch PLL off
Debug Messages On Show Debug messages
Block Data Transfer Transfer Data after Acquitstion has been done
ADDA DSP Connect Manually start/stop communication between DSP and ADDA
Form Memory Watch Shows some status data

Tools
Tip-Etching Open to etch STM tips
Initialization Open Initialization window
Data Recorder Open Datarecorder window
Flash Utility Utility to burn Flash on DSP Board with new DSP software

Help
Show STMAFM-Manual Show STMAFM Manual (PDF)

== Main Buttons ==
<Start> or <F1>: Start the scan

<Stop> or <F2>: Stop the scan

<Qsave> or <F3>: Automatically saves an image in the actual directory

<Copy> or <F4>: Copy Image1 to Image2

<LM> or <F5>: Perform a lateral manipulation

<VM> or <F6>: Perform a vertical manipulation or spectroscopy

<TF> or <F8>: Perform tip forming

<DA> or <F9>: Display the image with automatic line by line background subtraction

<DX> or <F10>: Display the image with automatic plane background subtraction

<DP> or <F11>: Display the image with planar background subtraction with predefined parameters

<LA> or <F12>: Display the image with automatic greyscale scaling

<LP> or <Shift F9>: Low pass filter

<HP> or <Shift F10>: High pass filter

<PLN> or <Shift F11>: Input 3 points for the plane used in plane background subtraction

<LIN> or <Shift F12>: Display a linear scan between two points on the image

== ==
[[category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Main

2016-12-21T08:48:00Z

Ltspm: /* Main Form */

== Main Form ==
The STMAFM form contains the main control elements of the software. Below the menu bar several control the data acquisition and analysis of the STM data.

To take a new image press the ''START'' button. To stop press the ''STOP'' button. When a new scan is started a default filename is assigned to the image. It consists of the date and time, when the scan was started. Its extension will be '.dat'. A single letter is put in the front of the name, which is used to indicate the machine name. (Example:' A020124.190937.dat' ). To save the file either press the ''QSAVE'' button which saves the file in the current directory, indicated in the status line at the bottom of the window, or use the menu command ''Save *.dat'' under ''File''. As long as the files has not been saved a ' * ' is attached to the file. ''Copy'' copies the data in the left image to the second image on the right.

The basic operations to display the data are done using the following buttons:

''DA'': Display the image using different line by line subtraction modes
''DX'': Display the image using automatic plane substraction
''DP'': Display the image using plane substraction
''LA'': Display image in DA mode and perform automatic scaling
''LP'': Perform a low pass filter operation
''HP'': Perform a high pass filter operation
''Pln'': Input 3 points (with the mouse) to determine the plane for plane background subtraction
''Lin'': Calculate a linescan along a line between 2 points
''LM'' Lateral manipulation
''VM'' Vertical manipulation of I/V spectroscopy
''TF'' Tip forming

Use <Disp LinePlan Quad> under <Display> in the menu subtract to perform an automatic line/plane subtraction using also quadratic terms
Below the buttons you find the Palette window, which displays the current 8bit palette. Use the left mouse button to switch between different standard palettes. Using the right mouse button will open a popup menu with additional options to create a user defined palette or to load and save externally defined palettes.

The small list box on the right is used for communication between different instances of the STMAFM program. If the instance of the program which is in data acquisition mode saves a file then this filename is send to all other instances of the program running in analysis mode.

Below the buttons the screen is separated in two parts, divided by an horizontaly movable slider. On the left is always the image of the current data file displayed. All the operations like scanning and image processing are done in this part on the window. On the right usually a list of all loaded files is displayed. A small icon image and some info is shown for each file. The two modes to display these data are 'Report" and 'Icon' view. The modes can be selected under menu item 'Display'. When in Report view pressing on the 'Image' bar will switch the way how the info is displayed. The list view can be suppressed by selecting 'Image2' under menu item 'Display' and the second image is displayed instead.

On the bottom of the window a status bar is located. It shows the current date and time, some status info about the scanning status, the mouse position on the image,the size of the image, the current default directory, the available space of disk storage.

[[file:clipstmafm.png|600px]]

== Menu Structure ==

'''File'''
Open *.DAT Open STMAFM DataFile
Save *.DAT Save STMAFM DataFile
QuickSave Save STMAFM DataFile in active directory

Export File
Save *.BMP Save Image as BMP-File
Save *.JPG Save as JPEG File
SaveEMF *.EMF Save Image in EMF Format
SaveAscii *.ASC Save Image-Data in ASCII Format

Import File
Load *.BMP Load BMP File
Load *.TIF Load TIF File

Print
Print Image Print the image
Print Listview Print the Filelist in Listview
Printer Setup Select the printer

Special
Compress Files All Files are saved using Data compression with Zlib
Save Listview-Files Save List of Files in the Listview window
Autosave *.bak Save all recorded images
AutoSave All Save all images
DOS-CommandLine Open a DOS-Window
HPData Get Data from Agilent Datalogger
Get_SRS_Lockin_Val Get External Lockin Setup Parameters

STMAFM-Analysis Start another copy of the STMAFM-Program
Exit Exit the STMAFM-Program
About About
ReOpen Opens the last file

Edit
Copy Clipbd Copy the image to the clipboard
Copy Dataimage2 Copy left image to the right
Copy Clipbd EMF Copy the image to the clipboard in EMF Format with Info
Copy New Window Copy the image into new form
Copy Overview Copy the image into the overview form
Copy Palette to Clipbd Copy the palette to the Clipboard

Scan
Scan Start Start the Scan
Scan Stop Stop the Scan
Enable/Start RepeatTimer Start the Repeat-Timer
Preamplifier Select the preamplifier
Preamp_Femto_LowNoise Select for Femto Preamp in Low Noise Mode
Preamp_Femto_HighSpeed Select for Femto Preamp in High Speed Mode
Preamp_Femto_100G Select for Femto Preamp with fixed gain 10^11
Preamp_UserType Select for User specific Preamp

Autofilesave Save every image
Autorepeat Start a new image automatically
Autodispreset Clear the image window when starting a new scan

Show Scanline Marker Display a red line at the actual scan line position
Display current Scan Profile Display the current line as a line scan in a separate window

Scan_Y_Direction Select the Scandirection (Top-Bottom,Bottom-Top,etc)
ScanCoarse Check to set scanning by Coarse Piezos otherwise the main Piezo is used

DSP
Lateral Manip. Lateral Manipulation
Vertical Manip. Vertical Manipulation
Tip Forming Tip Forming

SetXYOffset - Top Set the xy-offset for the new top site
SetXYOffset - Center Set the xy-offset for the new center site
SetXYOffset - Zoom Set the xy-offset for the new center site
ResetXYOffset Set the xy-offset to (0,0)
Copy Offset from Param Copy the xy-offset values from the scanparameterlist
1: Offsetx,y: 0 0 Select as new Offset
2: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
3: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
4: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
Set_Plan_Dx_Dy Set the parameters for the plan-offset.
Set_DSP_Clock Change the Clock-Frequency of the DSP-FeedBack-Loop

Image
Undo Filter Undo last image operation
Filter
LowPass Low Pass Filter the image
HighPass High Pass Filter the image
Laplace Laplace Filter the image
Median Median Filter
Edge(Horz) Edge Filter in the horizontal direction
Invert Invert the image
Imagedata * 10 The image data is multiplied by a factor of 10
Imagedata / 10 The image data is divided by a factor of 10

Resize
Zoom_Up_Rect Zoom up a selected rectangle
Resize / 2 Resize the image
Resize x 2 Resize the image
Interpolation / 2 Interpolate the image
Interpolation x 2 Interpolate the image

Rotate90deg

FFT
FFT2D Fast Fourier Transform
FFT2D Invers Inverse FFT
FFT2d Cutout Cutout a part of the FFT
FFT Evaluate Open FFT Evaluate window

Image Analysis
Histogram Show the histogram of the image
Areacalculation Calculate the size of islands
Islandsize Calculate the size of islands

Display
Zoom
100%
200%
300%
400%

ListView
Report Show files as icons and info
Icon Show files as icons only
Image2 Show Image2 and not the Listviewbox
ListViewBox enabled Enables the ListView Box
AutoclearList Clear the Listviewbox before new a new list is added
Largeiconsize=64-256 Icon size of the images in the listviewbox
Load Icon Plan Load the icons using image plan subtraction
Clear Listview Clear the ListView

DispCommands
DispAuto Display image using linear line background subtraction
DispPlanAuto Display image using auto plan background subtraction
DispPlan Display image using plan subtraction
Last Disp Autoscale Display with automatic scaling
Plan Auto Subtract Like Displanauto + subtract plane from image data
Linescan Linescan in the image
Plan2dinput Input 3 points to select the background subtraction plane
Configuration
DACunits Select DAC units
nm-Units [A] Select Angström units
Display Image in Lines Select to display image in line and not gray scale mode
Disp LinePlan Quad Select to perform lin.+quad. Backgroundsubtraction
Disp Plan and Subtract If selected Disp Plan subtracts the plane from the image data
Disp Automode Offset/Slope DA Mode subtract offset and slope line by line
Disp Automode Offset DA Mode subtract offset line by line
Disp Automode None DA Mode subtract offset of first line
Disp Automode Diff DA Mode differentiate image data line by line

Forms
Parameter
Lat.Manip Show the Latmanip window
Vert.Manip Show the Vertmanip. window
Time Spectrum Show the Time Spectrum window
AFM Show the AFM PLL window
Ramp-Controller Start Ramp Controller
New Channelform Open another Channelform
Linescan Show the linescan window
Draw Grid Show Grid window
3dView Show 3d View window
Memo Show separate Memo window
Overview Show the overview window
Slider Show the Slider window
User Form Show the User Form
Reset Form Positions Position all windows at (top,left) = (0,0)
Show/Hide Old Param Show/Hide the old Parameter window

Debug
Reset Scanstatus Enable all buttons again
Remote Open Remote window
Client Server Control Open Client Server Control
FIFO_COM USB2.0 Shows whether communication is by USB2.0 Hardware
Build Testimage Build a new image without scanning
STM Simulation Run the STM Programm in Simulation Mode (with DSP)
PLL Off Switch PLL off
Debug Messages On Show Debug messages
Block Data Transfer Transfer Data after Acquitstion has been done
ADDA DSP Connect Manually start/stop communication between DSP and ADDA
Form Memory Watch Shows some status data

Tools
Tip-Etching Open to etch STM tips
Initialization Open Initialization window
Data Recorder Open Datarecorder window
Flash Utility Utility to burn Flash on DSP Board with new DSP software

Help
Show STMAFM-Manual Show STMAFM Manual (PDF)

== Main Buttons ==
<Start> or <F1>: Start the scan

<Stop> or <F2>: Stop the scan

<Qsave> or <F3>: Automatically saves an image in the actual directory

<Copy> or <F4>: Copy Image1 to Image2

<LM> or <F5>: Perform a lateral manipulation

<VM> or <F6>: Perform a vertical manipulation or spectroscopy

<TF> or <F8>: Perform tip forming

<DA> or <F9>: Display the image with automatic line by line background subtraction

<DX> or <F10>: Display the image with automatic plane background subtraction

<DP> or <F11>: Display the image with planar background subtraction with predefined parameters

<LA> or <F12>: Display the image with automatic greyscale scaling

<LP> or <Shift F9>: Low pass filter

<HP> or <Shift F10>: High pass filter

<PLN> or <Shift F11>: Input 3 points for the plane used in plane background subtraction

<LIN> or <Shift F12>: Display a linear scan between two points on the image

== ==
[[category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Main

2016-12-21T08:45:01Z

Ltspm: /* Main Form */

== Main Form ==
The STMAFM form contains the main control elements of the software. Below the menu bar several control the data acquisition and analysis of the STM data.

To take a new image press the ''START'' button. To stop press the ''STOP'' button. When a new scan is started a default filename is assigned to the image. It consists of the date and time, when the scan was started. Its extension will be '.dat'. A single letter is put in the front of the name, which is used to indicate the machine name. (Example:' A020124.190937.dat' ). To save the file either press the <QSAVE> button which saves the file in the current directory, indicated in the status line at the bottom of the window, or use the menu command <Save *.dat> under <File>. As long as the files has not been saved a ' * ' is attached to the file. The <Copy> copies the data in the left image to the second image on the right.

The basic operations to display the data are done using the following buttons:

<DA>: Display the image using different line by line subtraction modes
<DX>: Display the image using automatic plane substraction
<DP>: Display the image using plane substraction
<LA>: Display image in DA mode and perform automatic scaling
<LP>: Perform a low pass filter operation
<HP>: Perform a high pass filter operation
<Pln>: Input 3 points (with the mouse) to determine the plane for plane background subtraction
<Lin>: Calculate a linescan along a line between 2 points
<LM> Lateral manipulation
<VM> Vertical manipulation of I/V spectroscopy
<TF> Tip forming

Use <Disp LinePlan Quad> under <Display> in the menu subtract to perform an automatic line/plane subtraction using also quadratic terms
Below the buttons you find the Palette window, which displays the current 8bit palette. Use the left mouse button to switch between different standard palettes. Using the right mouse button will open a popup menu with additional options to create a user defined palette or to load and save externally defined palettes.

The small list box on the right is used for communication between different instances of the STMAFM program. If the instance of the program which is in data acquisition mode saves a file then this filename is send to all other instances of the program running in analysis mode.

Below the buttons the screen is separated in two parts, divided by an horizontaly movable slider. On the left is always the image of the current data file displayed. All the operations like scanning and image processing are done in this part on the window. On the right usually a list of all loaded files is displayed. A small icon image and some info is shown for each file. The two modes to display these data are 'Report" and 'Icon' view. The modes can be selected under menu item 'Display'. When in Report view pressing on the 'Image' bar will switch the way how the info is displayed. The list view can be suppressed by selecting 'Image2' under menu item 'Display' and the second image is displayed instead.

On the bottom of the window a status bar is located. It shows the current date and time, some status info about the scanning status, the mouse position on the image,the size of the image, the current default directory, the available space of disk storage.

[[file:clipstmafm.png|600px]]

== Menu Structure ==

'''File'''
Open *.DAT Open STMAFM DataFile
Save *.DAT Save STMAFM DataFile
QuickSave Save STMAFM DataFile in active directory

Export File
Save *.BMP Save Image as BMP-File
Save *.JPG Save as JPEG File
SaveEMF *.EMF Save Image in EMF Format
SaveAscii *.ASC Save Image-Data in ASCII Format

Import File
Load *.BMP Load BMP File
Load *.TIF Load TIF File

Print
Print Image Print the image
Print Listview Print the Filelist in Listview
Printer Setup Select the printer

Special
Compress Files All Files are saved using Data compression with Zlib
Save Listview-Files Save List of Files in the Listview window
Autosave *.bak Save all recorded images
AutoSave All Save all images
DOS-CommandLine Open a DOS-Window
HPData Get Data from Agilent Datalogger
Get_SRS_Lockin_Val Get External Lockin Setup Parameters

STMAFM-Analysis Start another copy of the STMAFM-Program
Exit Exit the STMAFM-Program
About About
ReOpen Opens the last file

Edit
Copy Clipbd Copy the image to the clipboard
Copy Dataimage2 Copy left image to the right
Copy Clipbd EMF Copy the image to the clipboard in EMF Format with Info
Copy New Window Copy the image into new form
Copy Overview Copy the image into the overview form
Copy Palette to Clipbd Copy the palette to the Clipboard

Scan
Scan Start Start the Scan
Scan Stop Stop the Scan
Enable/Start RepeatTimer Start the Repeat-Timer
Preamplifier Select the preamplifier
Preamp_Femto_LowNoise Select for Femto Preamp in Low Noise Mode
Preamp_Femto_HighSpeed Select for Femto Preamp in High Speed Mode
Preamp_Femto_100G Select for Femto Preamp with fixed gain 10^11
Preamp_UserType Select for User specific Preamp

Autofilesave Save every image
Autorepeat Start a new image automatically
Autodispreset Clear the image window when starting a new scan

Show Scanline Marker Display a red line at the actual scan line position
Display current Scan Profile Display the current line as a line scan in a separate window

Scan_Y_Direction Select the Scandirection (Top-Bottom,Bottom-Top,etc)
ScanCoarse Check to set scanning by Coarse Piezos otherwise the main Piezo is used

DSP
Lateral Manip. Lateral Manipulation
Vertical Manip. Vertical Manipulation
Tip Forming Tip Forming

SetXYOffset - Top Set the xy-offset for the new top site
SetXYOffset - Center Set the xy-offset for the new center site
SetXYOffset - Zoom Set the xy-offset for the new center site
ResetXYOffset Set the xy-offset to (0,0)
Copy Offset from Param Copy the xy-offset values from the scanparameterlist
1: Offsetx,y: 0 0 Select as new Offset
2: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
3: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
4: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
Set_Plan_Dx_Dy Set the parameters for the plan-offset.
Set_DSP_Clock Change the Clock-Frequency of the DSP-FeedBack-Loop

Image
Undo Filter Undo last image operation
Filter
LowPass Low Pass Filter the image
HighPass High Pass Filter the image
Laplace Laplace Filter the image
Median Median Filter
Edge(Horz) Edge Filter in the horizontal direction
Invert Invert the image
Imagedata * 10 The image data is multiplied by a factor of 10
Imagedata / 10 The image data is divided by a factor of 10

Resize
Zoom_Up_Rect Zoom up a selected rectangle
Resize / 2 Resize the image
Resize x 2 Resize the image
Interpolation / 2 Interpolate the image
Interpolation x 2 Interpolate the image

Rotate90deg

FFT
FFT2D Fast Fourier Transform
FFT2D Invers Inverse FFT
FFT2d Cutout Cutout a part of the FFT
FFT Evaluate Open FFT Evaluate window

Image Analysis
Histogram Show the histogram of the image
Areacalculation Calculate the size of islands
Islandsize Calculate the size of islands

Display
Zoom
100%
200%
300%
400%

ListView
Report Show files as icons and info
Icon Show files as icons only
Image2 Show Image2 and not the Listviewbox
ListViewBox enabled Enables the ListView Box
AutoclearList Clear the Listviewbox before new a new list is added
Largeiconsize=64-256 Icon size of the images in the listviewbox
Load Icon Plan Load the icons using image plan subtraction
Clear Listview Clear the ListView

DispCommands
DispAuto Display image using linear line background subtraction
DispPlanAuto Display image using auto plan background subtraction
DispPlan Display image using plan subtraction
Last Disp Autoscale Display with automatic scaling
Plan Auto Subtract Like Displanauto + subtract plane from image data
Linescan Linescan in the image
Plan2dinput Input 3 points to select the background subtraction plane
Configuration
DACunits Select DAC units
nm-Units [A] Select Angström units
Display Image in Lines Select to display image in line and not gray scale mode
Disp LinePlan Quad Select to perform lin.+quad. Backgroundsubtraction
Disp Plan and Subtract If selected Disp Plan subtracts the plane from the image data
Disp Automode Offset/Slope DA Mode subtract offset and slope line by line
Disp Automode Offset DA Mode subtract offset line by line
Disp Automode None DA Mode subtract offset of first line
Disp Automode Diff DA Mode differentiate image data line by line

Forms
Parameter
Lat.Manip Show the Latmanip window
Vert.Manip Show the Vertmanip. window
Time Spectrum Show the Time Spectrum window
AFM Show the AFM PLL window
Ramp-Controller Start Ramp Controller
New Channelform Open another Channelform
Linescan Show the linescan window
Draw Grid Show Grid window
3dView Show 3d View window
Memo Show separate Memo window
Overview Show the overview window
Slider Show the Slider window
User Form Show the User Form
Reset Form Positions Position all windows at (top,left) = (0,0)
Show/Hide Old Param Show/Hide the old Parameter window

Debug
Reset Scanstatus Enable all buttons again
Remote Open Remote window
Client Server Control Open Client Server Control
FIFO_COM USB2.0 Shows whether communication is by USB2.0 Hardware
Build Testimage Build a new image without scanning
STM Simulation Run the STM Programm in Simulation Mode (with DSP)
PLL Off Switch PLL off
Debug Messages On Show Debug messages
Block Data Transfer Transfer Data after Acquitstion has been done
ADDA DSP Connect Manually start/stop communication between DSP and ADDA
Form Memory Watch Shows some status data

Tools
Tip-Etching Open to etch STM tips
Initialization Open Initialization window
Data Recorder Open Datarecorder window
Flash Utility Utility to burn Flash on DSP Board with new DSP software

Help
Show STMAFM-Manual Show STMAFM Manual (PDF)

== Main Buttons ==
<Start> or <F1>: Start the scan

<Stop> or <F2>: Stop the scan

<Qsave> or <F3>: Automatically saves an image in the actual directory

<Copy> or <F4>: Copy Image1 to Image2

<LM> or <F5>: Perform a lateral manipulation

<VM> or <F6>: Perform a vertical manipulation or spectroscopy

<TF> or <F8>: Perform tip forming

<DA> or <F9>: Display the image with automatic line by line background subtraction

<DX> or <F10>: Display the image with automatic plane background subtraction

<DP> or <F11>: Display the image with planar background subtraction with predefined parameters

<LA> or <F12>: Display the image with automatic greyscale scaling

<LP> or <Shift F9>: Low pass filter

<HP> or <Shift F10>: High pass filter

<PLN> or <Shift F11>: Input 3 points for the plane used in plane background subtraction

<LIN> or <Shift F12>: Display a linear scan between two points on the image

== ==
[[category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Main

2016-12-21T08:43:01Z

Ltspm: /* Main Form */

== Main Form ==
The STMAFM form contains the main control elements of the software. Below the menu bar several control the data acquisition and analysis of the STM data.

To take a new image press the '''START''' button. To stop press the '''STOP''' button. When a new scan is started a default filename is assigned to the image. It consists of the date and time, when the scan was started. Its extension will be '.dat'. A single letter is put in the front of the name, which is used to indicate the machine name. (Example:' A020124.190937.dat' ). To save the file either press the <QSAVE> button which saves the file in the current directory, indicated in the status line at the bottom of the window, or use the menu command <Save *.dat> under <File>. As long as the files has not been saved a ' * ' is attached to the file. The <Copy> copies the data in the left image to the second image on the right.

The basic operations to display the data are done using the following buttons:

<DA>: Display the image using different line by line subtraction modes
<DX>: Display the image using automatic plane substraction
<DP>: Display the image using plane substraction
<LA>: Display image in DA mode and perform automatic scaling
<LP>: Perform a low pass filter operation
<HP>: Perform a high pass filter operation
<Pln>: Input 3 points (with the mouse) to determine the plane for plane background subtraction
<Lin>: Calculate a linescan along a line between 2 points
<LM> Lateral manipulation
<VM> Vertical manipulation of I/V spectroscopy
<TF> Tip forming

Use <Disp LinePlan Quad> under <Display> in the menu subtract to perform an automatic line/plane subtraction using also quadratic terms
Below the buttons you find the Palette window, which displays the current 8bit palette. Use the left mouse button to switch between different standard palettes. Using the right mouse button will open a popup menu with additional options to create a user defined palette or to load and save externally defined palettes.

The small list box on the right is used for communication between different instances of the STMAFM program. If the instance of the program which is in data acquisition mode saves a file then this filename is send to all other instances of the program running in analysis mode.

Below the buttons the screen is separated in two parts, divided by an horizontaly movable slider. On the left is always the image of the current data file displayed. All the operations like scanning and image processing are done in this part on the window. On the right usually a list of all loaded files is displayed. A small icon image and some info is shown for each file. The two modes to display these data are 'Report" and 'Icon' view. The modes can be selected under menu item 'Display'. When in Report view pressing on the 'Image' bar will switch the way how the info is displayed. The list view can be suppressed by selecting 'Image2' under menu item 'Display' and the second image is displayed instead.

On the bottom of the window a status bar is located. It shows the current date and time, some status info about the scanning status, the mouse position on the image,the size of the image, the current default directory, the available space of disk storage.

[[file:clipstmafm.png|600px]]

== Menu Structure ==

'''File'''
Open *.DAT Open STMAFM DataFile
Save *.DAT Save STMAFM DataFile
QuickSave Save STMAFM DataFile in active directory

Export File
Save *.BMP Save Image as BMP-File
Save *.JPG Save as JPEG File
SaveEMF *.EMF Save Image in EMF Format
SaveAscii *.ASC Save Image-Data in ASCII Format

Import File
Load *.BMP Load BMP File
Load *.TIF Load TIF File

Print
Print Image Print the image
Print Listview Print the Filelist in Listview
Printer Setup Select the printer

Special
Compress Files All Files are saved using Data compression with Zlib
Save Listview-Files Save List of Files in the Listview window
Autosave *.bak Save all recorded images
AutoSave All Save all images
DOS-CommandLine Open a DOS-Window
HPData Get Data from Agilent Datalogger
Get_SRS_Lockin_Val Get External Lockin Setup Parameters

STMAFM-Analysis Start another copy of the STMAFM-Program
Exit Exit the STMAFM-Program
About About
ReOpen Opens the last file

Edit
Copy Clipbd Copy the image to the clipboard
Copy Dataimage2 Copy left image to the right
Copy Clipbd EMF Copy the image to the clipboard in EMF Format with Info
Copy New Window Copy the image into new form
Copy Overview Copy the image into the overview form
Copy Palette to Clipbd Copy the palette to the Clipboard

Scan
Scan Start Start the Scan
Scan Stop Stop the Scan
Enable/Start RepeatTimer Start the Repeat-Timer
Preamplifier Select the preamplifier
Preamp_Femto_LowNoise Select for Femto Preamp in Low Noise Mode
Preamp_Femto_HighSpeed Select for Femto Preamp in High Speed Mode
Preamp_Femto_100G Select for Femto Preamp with fixed gain 10^11
Preamp_UserType Select for User specific Preamp

Autofilesave Save every image
Autorepeat Start a new image automatically
Autodispreset Clear the image window when starting a new scan

Show Scanline Marker Display a red line at the actual scan line position
Display current Scan Profile Display the current line as a line scan in a separate window

Scan_Y_Direction Select the Scandirection (Top-Bottom,Bottom-Top,etc)
ScanCoarse Check to set scanning by Coarse Piezos otherwise the main Piezo is used

DSP
Lateral Manip. Lateral Manipulation
Vertical Manip. Vertical Manipulation
Tip Forming Tip Forming

SetXYOffset - Top Set the xy-offset for the new top site
SetXYOffset - Center Set the xy-offset for the new center site
SetXYOffset - Zoom Set the xy-offset for the new center site
ResetXYOffset Set the xy-offset to (0,0)
Copy Offset from Param Copy the xy-offset values from the scanparameterlist
1: Offsetx,y: 0 0 Select as new Offset
2: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
3: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
4: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
Set_Plan_Dx_Dy Set the parameters for the plan-offset.
Set_DSP_Clock Change the Clock-Frequency of the DSP-FeedBack-Loop

Image
Undo Filter Undo last image operation
Filter
LowPass Low Pass Filter the image
HighPass High Pass Filter the image
Laplace Laplace Filter the image
Median Median Filter
Edge(Horz) Edge Filter in the horizontal direction
Invert Invert the image
Imagedata * 10 The image data is multiplied by a factor of 10
Imagedata / 10 The image data is divided by a factor of 10

Resize
Zoom_Up_Rect Zoom up a selected rectangle
Resize / 2 Resize the image
Resize x 2 Resize the image
Interpolation / 2 Interpolate the image
Interpolation x 2 Interpolate the image

Rotate90deg

FFT
FFT2D Fast Fourier Transform
FFT2D Invers Inverse FFT
FFT2d Cutout Cutout a part of the FFT
FFT Evaluate Open FFT Evaluate window

Image Analysis
Histogram Show the histogram of the image
Areacalculation Calculate the size of islands
Islandsize Calculate the size of islands

Display
Zoom
100%
200%
300%
400%

ListView
Report Show files as icons and info
Icon Show files as icons only
Image2 Show Image2 and not the Listviewbox
ListViewBox enabled Enables the ListView Box
AutoclearList Clear the Listviewbox before new a new list is added
Largeiconsize=64-256 Icon size of the images in the listviewbox
Load Icon Plan Load the icons using image plan subtraction
Clear Listview Clear the ListView

DispCommands
DispAuto Display image using linear line background subtraction
DispPlanAuto Display image using auto plan background subtraction
DispPlan Display image using plan subtraction
Last Disp Autoscale Display with automatic scaling
Plan Auto Subtract Like Displanauto + subtract plane from image data
Linescan Linescan in the image
Plan2dinput Input 3 points to select the background subtraction plane
Configuration
DACunits Select DAC units
nm-Units [A] Select Angström units
Display Image in Lines Select to display image in line and not gray scale mode
Disp LinePlan Quad Select to perform lin.+quad. Backgroundsubtraction
Disp Plan and Subtract If selected Disp Plan subtracts the plane from the image data
Disp Automode Offset/Slope DA Mode subtract offset and slope line by line
Disp Automode Offset DA Mode subtract offset line by line
Disp Automode None DA Mode subtract offset of first line
Disp Automode Diff DA Mode differentiate image data line by line

Forms
Parameter
Lat.Manip Show the Latmanip window
Vert.Manip Show the Vertmanip. window
Time Spectrum Show the Time Spectrum window
AFM Show the AFM PLL window
Ramp-Controller Start Ramp Controller
New Channelform Open another Channelform
Linescan Show the linescan window
Draw Grid Show Grid window
3dView Show 3d View window
Memo Show separate Memo window
Overview Show the overview window
Slider Show the Slider window
User Form Show the User Form
Reset Form Positions Position all windows at (top,left) = (0,0)
Show/Hide Old Param Show/Hide the old Parameter window

Debug
Reset Scanstatus Enable all buttons again
Remote Open Remote window
Client Server Control Open Client Server Control
FIFO_COM USB2.0 Shows whether communication is by USB2.0 Hardware
Build Testimage Build a new image without scanning
STM Simulation Run the STM Programm in Simulation Mode (with DSP)
PLL Off Switch PLL off
Debug Messages On Show Debug messages
Block Data Transfer Transfer Data after Acquitstion has been done
ADDA DSP Connect Manually start/stop communication between DSP and ADDA
Form Memory Watch Shows some status data

Tools
Tip-Etching Open to etch STM tips
Initialization Open Initialization window
Data Recorder Open Datarecorder window
Flash Utility Utility to burn Flash on DSP Board with new DSP software

Help
Show STMAFM-Manual Show STMAFM Manual (PDF)

== Main Buttons ==
<Start> or <F1>: Start the scan

<Stop> or <F2>: Stop the scan

<Qsave> or <F3>: Automatically saves an image in the actual directory

<Copy> or <F4>: Copy Image1 to Image2

<LM> or <F5>: Perform a lateral manipulation

<VM> or <F6>: Perform a vertical manipulation or spectroscopy

<TF> or <F8>: Perform tip forming

<DA> or <F9>: Display the image with automatic line by line background subtraction

<DX> or <F10>: Display the image with automatic plane background subtraction

<DP> or <F11>: Display the image with planar background subtraction with predefined parameters

<LA> or <F12>: Display the image with automatic greyscale scaling

<LP> or <Shift F9>: Low pass filter

<HP> or <Shift F10>: High pass filter

<PLN> or <Shift F11>: Input 3 points for the plane used in plane background subtraction

<LIN> or <Shift F12>: Display a linear scan between two points on the image

== ==
[[category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Main

2016-12-21T08:33:55Z

Ltspm: /* Main Form */

== Main Form ==
The STMAFM form contains the main control elements of the software. Below the menu bar several control the data acquisition and analysis of the STM data.

To take a new image press the ''START'' button. To stop press the ''STOP'' button. When a new scan is started a default filename is assigned to the image. It consists of the date and time, when the scan was started. Its extension will be '.dat'. A single letter is put in the front of the name, which is used to indicate the machine name. (Example:' A020124.190937.dat' ). To save the file either press the <QSAVE> button which saves the file in the current directory, indicated in the status line at the bottom of the window, or use the menu command <Save *.dat> under <File>. As long as the files has not been saved a ' * ' is attached to the file. The <Copy> copies the data in the left image to the second image on the right.

The basic operations to display the data are done using the following buttons:

<DA>: Display the image using different line by line subtraction modes
<DX>: Display the image using automatic plane substraction
<DP>: Display the image using plane substraction
<LA>: Display image in DA mode and perform automatic scaling
<LP>: Perform a low pass filter operation
<HP>: Perform a high pass filter operation
<Pln>: Input 3 points (with the mouse) to determine the plane for plane background subtraction
<Lin>: Calculate a linescan along a line between 2 points
<LM> Lateral manipulation
<VM> Vertical manipulation of I/V spectroscopy
<TF> Tip forming

Use <Disp LinePlan Quad> under <Display> in the menu subtract to perform an automatic line/plane subtraction using also quadratic terms
Below the buttons you find the Palette window, which displays the current 8bit palette. Use the left mouse button to switch between different standard palettes. Using the right mouse button will open a popup menu with additional options to create a user defined palette or to load and save externally defined palettes.

The small list box on the right is used for communication between different instances of the STMAFM program. If the instance of the program which is in data acquisition mode saves a file then this filename is send to all other instances of the program running in analysis mode.

Below the buttons the screen is separated in two parts, divided by an horizontaly movable slider. On the left is always the image of the current data file displayed. All the operations like scanning and image processing are done in this part on the window. On the right usually a list of all loaded files is displayed. A small icon image and some info is shown for each file. The two modes to display these data are 'Report" and 'Icon' view. The modes can be selected under menu item 'Display'. When in Report view pressing on the 'Image' bar will switch the way how the info is displayed. The list view can be suppressed by selecting 'Image2' under menu item 'Display' and the second image is displayed instead.

On the bottom of the window a status bar is located. It shows the current date and time, some status info about the scanning status, the mouse position on the image,the size of the image, the current default directory, the available space of disk storage.

[[file:clipstmafm.png|600px]]

== Menu Structure ==

'''File'''
Open *.DAT Open STMAFM DataFile
Save *.DAT Save STMAFM DataFile
QuickSave Save STMAFM DataFile in active directory

Export File
Save *.BMP Save Image as BMP-File
Save *.JPG Save as JPEG File
SaveEMF *.EMF Save Image in EMF Format
SaveAscii *.ASC Save Image-Data in ASCII Format

Import File
Load *.BMP Load BMP File
Load *.TIF Load TIF File

Print
Print Image Print the image
Print Listview Print the Filelist in Listview
Printer Setup Select the printer

Special
Compress Files All Files are saved using Data compression with Zlib
Save Listview-Files Save List of Files in the Listview window
Autosave *.bak Save all recorded images
AutoSave All Save all images
DOS-CommandLine Open a DOS-Window
HPData Get Data from Agilent Datalogger
Get_SRS_Lockin_Val Get External Lockin Setup Parameters

STMAFM-Analysis Start another copy of the STMAFM-Program
Exit Exit the STMAFM-Program
About About
ReOpen Opens the last file

Edit
Copy Clipbd Copy the image to the clipboard
Copy Dataimage2 Copy left image to the right
Copy Clipbd EMF Copy the image to the clipboard in EMF Format with Info
Copy New Window Copy the image into new form
Copy Overview Copy the image into the overview form
Copy Palette to Clipbd Copy the palette to the Clipboard

Scan
Scan Start Start the Scan
Scan Stop Stop the Scan
Enable/Start RepeatTimer Start the Repeat-Timer
Preamplifier Select the preamplifier
Preamp_Femto_LowNoise Select for Femto Preamp in Low Noise Mode
Preamp_Femto_HighSpeed Select for Femto Preamp in High Speed Mode
Preamp_Femto_100G Select for Femto Preamp with fixed gain 10^11
Preamp_UserType Select for User specific Preamp

Autofilesave Save every image
Autorepeat Start a new image automatically
Autodispreset Clear the image window when starting a new scan

Show Scanline Marker Display a red line at the actual scan line position
Display current Scan Profile Display the current line as a line scan in a separate window

Scan_Y_Direction Select the Scandirection (Top-Bottom,Bottom-Top,etc)
ScanCoarse Check to set scanning by Coarse Piezos otherwise the main Piezo is used

DSP
Lateral Manip. Lateral Manipulation
Vertical Manip. Vertical Manipulation
Tip Forming Tip Forming

SetXYOffset - Top Set the xy-offset for the new top site
SetXYOffset - Center Set the xy-offset for the new center site
SetXYOffset - Zoom Set the xy-offset for the new center site
ResetXYOffset Set the xy-offset to (0,0)
Copy Offset from Param Copy the xy-offset values from the scanparameterlist
1: Offsetx,y: 0 0 Select as new Offset
2: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
3: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
4: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
Set_Plan_Dx_Dy Set the parameters for the plan-offset.
Set_DSP_Clock Change the Clock-Frequency of the DSP-FeedBack-Loop

Image
Undo Filter Undo last image operation
Filter
LowPass Low Pass Filter the image
HighPass High Pass Filter the image
Laplace Laplace Filter the image
Median Median Filter
Edge(Horz) Edge Filter in the horizontal direction
Invert Invert the image
Imagedata * 10 The image data is multiplied by a factor of 10
Imagedata / 10 The image data is divided by a factor of 10

Resize
Zoom_Up_Rect Zoom up a selected rectangle
Resize / 2 Resize the image
Resize x 2 Resize the image
Interpolation / 2 Interpolate the image
Interpolation x 2 Interpolate the image

Rotate90deg

FFT
FFT2D Fast Fourier Transform
FFT2D Invers Inverse FFT
FFT2d Cutout Cutout a part of the FFT
FFT Evaluate Open FFT Evaluate window

Image Analysis
Histogram Show the histogram of the image
Areacalculation Calculate the size of islands
Islandsize Calculate the size of islands

Display
Zoom
100%
200%
300%
400%

ListView
Report Show files as icons and info
Icon Show files as icons only
Image2 Show Image2 and not the Listviewbox
ListViewBox enabled Enables the ListView Box
AutoclearList Clear the Listviewbox before new a new list is added
Largeiconsize=64-256 Icon size of the images in the listviewbox
Load Icon Plan Load the icons using image plan subtraction
Clear Listview Clear the ListView

DispCommands
DispAuto Display image using linear line background subtraction
DispPlanAuto Display image using auto plan background subtraction
DispPlan Display image using plan subtraction
Last Disp Autoscale Display with automatic scaling
Plan Auto Subtract Like Displanauto + subtract plane from image data
Linescan Linescan in the image
Plan2dinput Input 3 points to select the background subtraction plane
Configuration
DACunits Select DAC units
nm-Units [A] Select Angström units
Display Image in Lines Select to display image in line and not gray scale mode
Disp LinePlan Quad Select to perform lin.+quad. Backgroundsubtraction
Disp Plan and Subtract If selected Disp Plan subtracts the plane from the image data
Disp Automode Offset/Slope DA Mode subtract offset and slope line by line
Disp Automode Offset DA Mode subtract offset line by line
Disp Automode None DA Mode subtract offset of first line
Disp Automode Diff DA Mode differentiate image data line by line

Forms
Parameter
Lat.Manip Show the Latmanip window
Vert.Manip Show the Vertmanip. window
Time Spectrum Show the Time Spectrum window
AFM Show the AFM PLL window
Ramp-Controller Start Ramp Controller
New Channelform Open another Channelform
Linescan Show the linescan window
Draw Grid Show Grid window
3dView Show 3d View window
Memo Show separate Memo window
Overview Show the overview window
Slider Show the Slider window
User Form Show the User Form
Reset Form Positions Position all windows at (top,left) = (0,0)
Show/Hide Old Param Show/Hide the old Parameter window

Debug
Reset Scanstatus Enable all buttons again
Remote Open Remote window
Client Server Control Open Client Server Control
FIFO_COM USB2.0 Shows whether communication is by USB2.0 Hardware
Build Testimage Build a new image without scanning
STM Simulation Run the STM Programm in Simulation Mode (with DSP)
PLL Off Switch PLL off
Debug Messages On Show Debug messages
Block Data Transfer Transfer Data after Acquitstion has been done
ADDA DSP Connect Manually start/stop communication between DSP and ADDA
Form Memory Watch Shows some status data

Tools
Tip-Etching Open to etch STM tips
Initialization Open Initialization window
Data Recorder Open Datarecorder window
Flash Utility Utility to burn Flash on DSP Board with new DSP software

Help
Show STMAFM-Manual Show STMAFM Manual (PDF)

== Main Buttons ==
<Start> or <F1>: Start the scan

<Stop> or <F2>: Stop the scan

<Qsave> or <F3>: Automatically saves an image in the actual directory

<Copy> or <F4>: Copy Image1 to Image2

<LM> or <F5>: Perform a lateral manipulation

<VM> or <F6>: Perform a vertical manipulation or spectroscopy

<TF> or <F8>: Perform tip forming

<DA> or <F9>: Display the image with automatic line by line background subtraction

<DX> or <F10>: Display the image with automatic plane background subtraction

<DP> or <F11>: Display the image with planar background subtraction with predefined parameters

<LA> or <F12>: Display the image with automatic greyscale scaling

<LP> or <Shift F9>: Low pass filter

<HP> or <Shift F10>: High pass filter

<PLN> or <Shift F11>: Input 3 points for the plane used in plane background subtraction

<LIN> or <Shift F12>: Display a linear scan between two points on the image

== ==
[[category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Main

2016-12-21T08:26:00Z

Ltspm: /* Main Form */

== Main Form ==
The STMAFM form contains the main control elements of the software. Below the menu bar several control the data acquisition and analysis of the STM data.

To take a new image press the <START> button. To stop press the STOP button. When a new scan is started a default filename is assigned to the image. It consists of the date and time, when the scan was started. Its extension will be '.dat'. A single letter is put in the front of the name, which is used to indicate the machine name. (Example:' A020124.190937.dat' ). To save the file either press the <QSAVE> button which saves the file in the current directory, indicated in the status line at the bottom of the window, or use the menu command <Save *.dat> under <File>. As long as the files has not been saved a ' * ' is attached to the file. The <Copy> copies the data in the left image to the second image on the right.

The basic operations to display the data are done using the following buttons:

<DA>: Display the image using different line by line subtraction modes
<DX>: Display the image using automatic plane substraction
<DP>: Display the image using plane substraction
<LA>: Display image in DA mode and perform automatic scaling
<LP>: Perform a low pass filter operation
<HP>: Perform a high pass filter operation
<Pln>: Input 3 points (with the mouse) to determine the plane for plane background subtraction
<Lin>: Calculate a linescan along a line between 2 points
<LM> Lateral manipulation
<VM> Vertical manipulation of I/V spectroscopy
<TF> Tip forming

Use <Disp LinePlan Quad> under <Display> in the menu subtract to perform an automatic line/plane subtraction using also quadratic terms
Below the buttons you find the Palette window, which displays the current 8bit palette. Use the left mouse button to switch between different standard palettes. Using the right mouse button will open a popup menu with additional options to create a user defined palette or to load and save externally defined palettes.

The small list box on the right is used for communication between different instances of the STMAFM program. If the instance of the program which is in data acquisition mode saves a file then this filename is send to all other instances of the program running in analysis mode.

Below the buttons the screen is separated in two parts, divided by an horizontaly movable slider. On the left is always the image of the current data file displayed. All the operations like scanning and image processing are done in this part on the window. On the right usually a list of all loaded files is displayed. A small icon image and some info is shown for each file. The two modes to display these data are 'Report" and 'Icon' view. The modes can be selected under menu item 'Display'. When in Report view pressing on the 'Image' bar will switch the way how the info is displayed. The list view can be suppressed by selecting 'Image2' under menu item 'Display' and the second image is displayed instead.

On the bottom of the window a status bar is located. It shows the current date and time, some status info about the scanning status, the mouse position on the image,the size of the image, the current default directory, the available space of disk storage.

[[file:clipstmafm.png|600px]]

== Menu Structure ==

'''File'''
Open *.DAT Open STMAFM DataFile
Save *.DAT Save STMAFM DataFile
QuickSave Save STMAFM DataFile in active directory

Export File
Save *.BMP Save Image as BMP-File
Save *.JPG Save as JPEG File
SaveEMF *.EMF Save Image in EMF Format
SaveAscii *.ASC Save Image-Data in ASCII Format

Import File
Load *.BMP Load BMP File
Load *.TIF Load TIF File

Print
Print Image Print the image
Print Listview Print the Filelist in Listview
Printer Setup Select the printer

Special
Compress Files All Files are saved using Data compression with Zlib
Save Listview-Files Save List of Files in the Listview window
Autosave *.bak Save all recorded images
AutoSave All Save all images
DOS-CommandLine Open a DOS-Window
HPData Get Data from Agilent Datalogger
Get_SRS_Lockin_Val Get External Lockin Setup Parameters

STMAFM-Analysis Start another copy of the STMAFM-Program
Exit Exit the STMAFM-Program
About About
ReOpen Opens the last file

Edit
Copy Clipbd Copy the image to the clipboard
Copy Dataimage2 Copy left image to the right
Copy Clipbd EMF Copy the image to the clipboard in EMF Format with Info
Copy New Window Copy the image into new form
Copy Overview Copy the image into the overview form
Copy Palette to Clipbd Copy the palette to the Clipboard

Scan
Scan Start Start the Scan
Scan Stop Stop the Scan
Enable/Start RepeatTimer Start the Repeat-Timer
Preamplifier Select the preamplifier
Preamp_Femto_LowNoise Select for Femto Preamp in Low Noise Mode
Preamp_Femto_HighSpeed Select for Femto Preamp in High Speed Mode
Preamp_Femto_100G Select for Femto Preamp with fixed gain 10^11
Preamp_UserType Select for User specific Preamp

Autofilesave Save every image
Autorepeat Start a new image automatically
Autodispreset Clear the image window when starting a new scan

Show Scanline Marker Display a red line at the actual scan line position
Display current Scan Profile Display the current line as a line scan in a separate window

Scan_Y_Direction Select the Scandirection (Top-Bottom,Bottom-Top,etc)
ScanCoarse Check to set scanning by Coarse Piezos otherwise the main Piezo is used

DSP
Lateral Manip. Lateral Manipulation
Vertical Manip. Vertical Manipulation
Tip Forming Tip Forming

SetXYOffset - Top Set the xy-offset for the new top site
SetXYOffset - Center Set the xy-offset for the new center site
SetXYOffset - Zoom Set the xy-offset for the new center site
ResetXYOffset Set the xy-offset to (0,0)
Copy Offset from Param Copy the xy-offset values from the scanparameterlist
1: Offsetx,y: 0 0 Select as new Offset
2: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
3: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
4: Offsetx,y 0 0 Select as new Offset
Set_Plan_Dx_Dy Set the parameters for the plan-offset.
Set_DSP_Clock Change the Clock-Frequency of the DSP-FeedBack-Loop

Image
Undo Filter Undo last image operation
Filter
LowPass Low Pass Filter the image
HighPass High Pass Filter the image
Laplace Laplace Filter the image
Median Median Filter
Edge(Horz) Edge Filter in the horizontal direction
Invert Invert the image
Imagedata * 10 The image data is multiplied by a factor of 10
Imagedata / 10 The image data is divided by a factor of 10

Resize
Zoom_Up_Rect Zoom up a selected rectangle
Resize / 2 Resize the image
Resize x 2 Resize the image
Interpolation / 2 Interpolate the image
Interpolation x 2 Interpolate the image

Rotate90deg

FFT
FFT2D Fast Fourier Transform
FFT2D Invers Inverse FFT
FFT2d Cutout Cutout a part of the FFT
FFT Evaluate Open FFT Evaluate window

Image Analysis
Histogram Show the histogram of the image
Areacalculation Calculate the size of islands
Islandsize Calculate the size of islands

Display
Zoom
100%
200%
300%
400%

ListView
Report Show files as icons and info
Icon Show files as icons only
Image2 Show Image2 and not the Listviewbox
ListViewBox enabled Enables the ListView Box
AutoclearList Clear the Listviewbox before new a new list is added
Largeiconsize=64-256 Icon size of the images in the listviewbox
Load Icon Plan Load the icons using image plan subtraction
Clear Listview Clear the ListView

DispCommands
DispAuto Display image using linear line background subtraction
DispPlanAuto Display image using auto plan background subtraction
DispPlan Display image using plan subtraction
Last Disp Autoscale Display with automatic scaling
Plan Auto Subtract Like Displanauto + subtract plane from image data
Linescan Linescan in the image
Plan2dinput Input 3 points to select the background subtraction plane
Configuration
DACunits Select DAC units
nm-Units [A] Select Angström units
Display Image in Lines Select to display image in line and not gray scale mode
Disp LinePlan Quad Select to perform lin.+quad. Backgroundsubtraction
Disp Plan and Subtract If selected Disp Plan subtracts the plane from the image data
Disp Automode Offset/Slope DA Mode subtract offset and slope line by line
Disp Automode Offset DA Mode subtract offset line by line
Disp Automode None DA Mode subtract offset of first line
Disp Automode Diff DA Mode differentiate image data line by line

Forms
Parameter
Lat.Manip Show the Latmanip window
Vert.Manip Show the Vertmanip. window
Time Spectrum Show the Time Spectrum window
AFM Show the AFM PLL window
Ramp-Controller Start Ramp Controller
New Channelform Open another Channelform
Linescan Show the linescan window
Draw Grid Show Grid window
3dView Show 3d View window
Memo Show separate Memo window
Overview Show the overview window
Slider Show the Slider window
User Form Show the User Form
Reset Form Positions Position all windows at (top,left) = (0,0)
Show/Hide Old Param Show/Hide the old Parameter window

Debug
Reset Scanstatus Enable all buttons again
Remote Open Remote window
Client Server Control Open Client Server Control
FIFO_COM USB2.0 Shows whether communication is by USB2.0 Hardware
Build Testimage Build a new image without scanning
STM Simulation Run the STM Programm in Simulation Mode (with DSP)
PLL Off Switch PLL off
Debug Messages On Show Debug messages
Block Data Transfer Transfer Data after Acquitstion has been done
ADDA DSP Connect Manually start/stop communication between DSP and ADDA
Form Memory Watch Shows some status data

Tools
Tip-Etching Open to etch STM tips
Initialization Open Initialization window
Data Recorder Open Datarecorder window
Flash Utility Utility to burn Flash on DSP Board with new DSP software

Help
Show STMAFM-Manual Show STMAFM Manual (PDF)

== Main Buttons ==
<Start> or <F1>: Start the scan

<Stop> or <F2>: Stop the scan

<Qsave> or <F3>: Automatically saves an image in the actual directory

<Copy> or <F4>: Copy Image1 to Image2

<LM> or <F5>: Perform a lateral manipulation

<VM> or <F6>: Perform a vertical manipulation or spectroscopy

<TF> or <F8>: Perform tip forming

<DA> or <F9>: Display the image with automatic line by line background subtraction

<DX> or <F10>: Display the image with automatic plane background subtraction

<DP> or <F11>: Display the image with planar background subtraction with predefined parameters

<LA> or <F12>: Display the image with automatic greyscale scaling

<LP> or <Shift F9>: Low pass filter

<HP> or <Shift F10>: High pass filter

<PLN> or <Shift F11>: Input 3 points for the plane used in plane background subtraction

<LIN> or <Shift F12>: Display a linear scan between two points on the image

== ==
[[category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-10-06T13:17:00Z

Ltspm: /* scandata */

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab (or Freemat using a corresponding dll).
We recommend controlling the STMAFM program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STMAFM program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STMAFM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STMAFM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM program creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes.

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel,unit_volt);

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== setchmodezoff ===

Parameter : zoffset

Return: none

Function: Sets the const height Zoffset value

Example:
a=stm.setchmodezoff(1.0);

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V, zduration: single, zburst: integer, xyheight:single, xyduration: single, xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-10-06T13:16:36Z

Ltspm: /* scandata */

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab (or Freemat using a corresponding dll).
We recommend controlling the STMAFM program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STMAFM program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STMAFM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STMAFM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM program creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes.

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:
units: integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel,unit_volt);

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== setchmodezoff ===

Parameter : zoffset

Return: none

Function: Sets the const height Zoffset value

Example:
a=stm.setchmodezoff(1.0);

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V, zduration: single, zburst: integer, xyheight:single, xyduration: single, xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

Tip Heating

2015-09-21T12:55:33Z

Ltspm: Created page with "== Mechanically transferred tips == Here you use a tweezer on a magnetically coupled wobble stick to transfer the tips into and out off the STM. You may use the tip transfer ..."

== Mechanically transferred tips ==

Here you use a tweezer on a magnetically coupled wobble stick to transfer the tips into and out off the STM. You may use the tip transfer plate with the tip holder inside holding it with the wobble stick above the heater while touching the heater plate with the tip transfer plate. The heater should be negativly charged (-600V) and the heater plate needs to be grounded. This way you may heat a STM tip inside a heatable tip holder until it glows orange. The CCD camera in the video automatically adjusts the brightness all the time, so you see the filament in the beginning and the tip in the end.
[[:File:SpitzeHeizen_1000V+50mA.mp4]]

File:SpitzeHeizen 1000V+50mA.mp4

2015-09-21T12:55:03Z

Ltspm: MsUpload

MsUpload

Tip Preparation

2015-09-21T12:43:50Z

Ltspm:

#[[Tip Etching]]
#[[Tip Heating]]
#[[Tip Reshaping]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-08-05T18:34:30Z

Ltspm: /* setrampdspparam */

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab (or Freemat using a corresponding dll).
We recommend controlling the STMAFM program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STMAFM program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STMAFM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STMAFM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM program creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes.

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== setchmodezoff ===

Parameter : zoffset

Return: none

Function: Sets the const height Zoffset value

Example:
a=stm.setchmodezoff(1.0);

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V, zduration: single, zburst: integer, xyheight:single, xyduration: single, xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-08-05T18:33:20Z

Ltspm: /* setrampdspparam */

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab (or Freemat using a corresponding dll).
We recommend controlling the STMAFM program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STMAFM program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STMAFM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STMAFM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM program creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes.

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== setchmodezoff ===

Parameter : zoffset

Return: none

Function: Sets the const height Zoffset value

Example:
a=stm.setchmodezoff(1.0);

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V

zduration: single
zburst: integer
xyheight:single
xyduration: single
xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-08-05T18:33:01Z

Ltspm: /* setrampdspparam */

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab (or Freemat using a corresponding dll).
We recommend controlling the STMAFM program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STMAFM program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STMAFM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STMAFM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM program creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes.

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== setchmodezoff ===

Parameter : zoffset

Return: none

Function: Sets the const height Zoffset value

Example:
a=stm.setchmodezoff(1.0);

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V
zduration: single
zburst: integer
xyheight:single
xyduration: single
xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-08-05T18:32:22Z

Ltspm: /* setchmodezoff */

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab (or Freemat using a corresponding dll).
We recommend controlling the STMAFM program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STMAFM program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STMAFM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STMAFM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM program creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes.

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== setchmodezoff ===

Parameter : zoffset

Return: none

Function: Sets the const height Zoffset value

Example:
a=stm.setchmodezoff(1.0);

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V
zduration: single
zburst: integer
xyheight:single
xyduration: single
xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-08-05T18:30:36Z

Ltspm:

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab (or Freemat using a corresponding dll).
We recommend controlling the STMAFM program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STMAFM program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STMAFM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STMAFM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM program creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes.

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== setchmodezoff ===

Parameter : zoffset

Return: none

Function: Sets the const height Zoffset value

Example:
a=stm.setchmodezoff(1.0);

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V
zduration: single
zburst: integer
xyheight:single
xyduration: single
xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

Service and Installation

2015-06-18T15:07:33Z

Ltspm: /* Preparation for Service */

== Preparation for Service ==

Retract the tip

Service and Installation

2015-06-18T15:07:04Z

Ltspm:

== Preparation for Service ==

Service and Installation

2015-06-18T15:02:52Z

Ltspm: Created page with "Preparation for Service"

Preparation for Service

Main Page

2015-06-18T14:59:44Z

Ltspm: /* STM/AFM Hardware Online Manual */

== STMAFM Software Online Manual==
#[[Installation]]
#[[STMAFM Main]]
#[[Parameter]]
#[[Forms]]
#[[Tools]]
#[[Contacts]]
#[[STMAFM Remote Operation]]
#[[Hardware Driver Installation]]
#[[Hardware 2.0]]
#[[Additional Information]]
#[[Legacy Commands]]

== STM/AFM Hardware Online Manual==
#[[Besocke Type STM Head]]
#[[Slider Type STM Head]]
#[[Sample Holders]]
#[[qPlus Sensors]]
#[[Tip Preparation]]
#[[Service and Installation]]

Slider Type STM Head

2015-04-27T09:10:01Z

Ltspm:

[[File:Slider_Head_CAD.jpg|400px]]
[[File:Slider_Head_large.jpg|400px]]

== Sample transfer to STM head ==

file1

== Sample transfer to cooling station ==

file2

== Tip transfer to STM head ==

file3

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-01-05T14:03:28Z

Ltspm:

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab (or Freemat using a corresponding dll).
We recommend controlling the STMAFM program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STMAFM program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STMAFM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STMAFM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM program creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes.

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V
zduration: single
zburst: integer
xyheight:single
xyduration: single
xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-01-05T13:42:05Z

Ltspm: /* Python Connection */

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software

import win32com.client

stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")

stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab. (or Freemat using a corresponding dll)
We recommend controlling the STMAFM Program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STM Program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM Programm creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V
zduration: single
zburst: integer
xyheight:single
xyduration: single
xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-01-05T13:41:15Z

Ltspm:

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Python Connection ==

We recommend to install WinPython 2.7.x and using the IPython Notebook therein. These command will initialize the connection to the STMAFM program. Afterwards you may import / export files using filters from the program and control the complete software
import win32com.client
stm=win32com.client.Dispatch("pstmafm.stmafmrem")
stm.stmbeep()

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm OLE/COM server directly from Matlab. (or Freemat using a corresponding dll)
We recommend controlling the STMAFM Program through this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STM Program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM Programm creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V
zduration: single
zburst: integer
xyheight:single
xyduration: single
xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

STMAFM Remote Operation

2015-01-05T13:30:14Z

Ltspm: /* OLE/COM Server */

== OLE/COM Server ==

To register the OLE/COM sever in the stmafm program goto "Debug" and "Register COM Server". If you are going to install a newer version of the program, please click "Unregister COM Server" before installing the new version. Both has to be done with administrative rights as it requires access to the Windows registry.

You may also run "pstmafm.exe / regserver" form the command prompt.
(Alternatively run "pstmafm.exe /regserverperuser" in case you have problems running /regserver in Windows 7)
Again administrator rights are required.

There are many different software tools available to perform data analysis as well as data aquisition or remote operation of the STMAFM program via OLE/COM:

1. Python (Freeware, please visit http://winpython.sourceforge.net/ for download) we're using WinPython 2.7.x 32bit, 64bit

2. Commercial Software: MatLab / LabView

3. For more specific purposes with a more elaborate user interface Createc can supply dedicated plugin programs. (Contact ltspm@createc.de to solve your specific needs)

For simple scripting purposes, i.e. controlling the program without data analysis a scripter program is can still be used.(e.g. MAXBOX) But for people starting from scratch we recommend using the OLE/COM interface as we will drop the support via the TCPIP interface in future.

Example software will be provided through the Createc WebSite.

== Matlab Connection ==

You can access the pstmafm.stmafm Ole/Com server directly from Matlab. (or Freemat using a corresponding dll)
We recommend controlling the STMAFM Program thorugh this interface.

stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem'); %Open connection to STM Program, see also Matlab manual.
stm.stmbeep; %
stm.release; % release stm program

The STM program will be started and closed automatically from Matlab. If the STM program is already running just the connection will be established.

Demo Startstm.m with event capability

global stm
global stm1
global linescandata
stm=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmrem');
stm1=actxserver('pstmafm.stmafmevent');
stm1.registerevent('serverevents');
%registerevent: register a file serverevents.m to handle events.

Example: serverevents.m

function serverevents(varargin)
global stmoleeventnr
global linescandata
global stm
stmoleeventnr = cell2mat(varargin(3));
linescandata = stm.linescandata;
if (stmoleeventnr == 1)
plot(linescandata(:,1),linescandata(:,2));
end

== Plugins ==

Specifically developed Plugins will be available to supply specific user needs. In particular where a more elaborate graphical user interface is
necessary compared to a simple text based scripting control.

== Commands ==

=== stmbeep ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: STMAFM Programm creates a short beep sound. Used for testing purposes

=== setparam ===

Parameter : (Strings)
1. Name of parameter
2. New Value

Return:

Function: Sets a parameter to a new value. The name is the name appearing in the old parameter menue

Example:
stm.setparam('Rotation','90.00');

=== getparam ===

Parameter :
1. Name of parameter

Return:
1. Value of Parameter

Function: Gets the actual parameter value. The name is the name appearing the old parameter menue

Example:
a=stm.getparam('Rotation');

=== scanstart ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Starts a new STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstart

=== scanwaitfinished ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Waits until the active scan is stopped.

=== scanstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops a running STM scan. Similar to pressing the button Scanstop

=== scanstatus ===

Parameter : None

Return: Status Number ( = ord(scanstat) see below)

Function: Gets the present scanstatus.

scanstat = (scanstatreset, stop, running, start, resetting, pause, scanstatvertman, scanstatlatman, scanstattimespec, scanxyoffset,scanstatapproach);

0, SCANSTATRESET: Programm is in idle state
1, STOP: Running Scan is stopped but is not fully reset yet.
2, RUNNING: Scan is running
3, START New Scan is started but not yet running
4, PAUSE Running Scan is paused
5, SCANSTATVERTMAN VertSpectrum is running
6, SCANSTATLATMAN LATManip is running
7, SCANSTATTIMESPEC Timespectrum is running
8, SCANXYOFFSET XYOffset is running
9, SCANSTATAPPROACH Approach is running

=== quicksave ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scan file using the default filename. Similar to presisng the Quicksave button

=== filesave ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Saves the current scandata file using the filename as .dat file.

=== fileload ===

Parameter : Filename

Return: None

Function: Loads a .dat file into the program.

=== vertsave ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present vertspecdata

Usage:
a=stm.vertsave;

=== latsave ===
Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: save present latmanipdata

Usage:
a=stm.latsave;

=== savedatfilename ===

Property String

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Read and write the default savefilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savedatfilename;

stm.savefilename=filename;

=== loadfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default loadfilename of .dat files.

Usage:

filename=stm.loaddatfilename;

stm.loadfilename=filename;

=== savevertfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Vertspec files.

Usage:

filename=stm.savevertfilename;

stm.savevertfilename=filename;

=== savelatfilename ===

Property String

Function: Read and write the default filename of Latmanip files.

Usage:
filename=stm.savelatfilename;

stm.savelatfilename:=filename;

=== btn_vertspec ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window) Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec(128,128);

=== btn_vertspec_line ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None
Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_vertspec_line(50,50,100,100);

=== btn_vertspec_mult ===

Parameter : 2d Array of X,Y coordinates
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
2. Y coordinate in imagepixels of 1.point
.......

2n-1. X coordinate in imagepixels of n.point
2n. Y coordinate in imagepixels of n.point

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a series of Vert.Spectra defined by a list of image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the spectra have been completely finished

Usage:
a=[10,20;50,50;100,100;19,90];
stm.btn_vertspec_line(a);

=== btn_tipform ===

Parameter :
1. xpos :integer
2. ypos :integer

Return: None

Function: Does a tip forming at image point Xpos,Ypos. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window). Control is returned after the tip forming has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.btn_tipform(128,128);

=== btn_timespec ===

Parameter : none

Return: None

Function: Takes a time spectrum

Usage:
stm.btn_timespec;

=== scandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer:integer

Return: Array with Scan Channel Data

Function: Read single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
a=stm.scandata(channel); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

If backward scanning channels are enabled, these channels are accessed by adding 256 as offset to the channel number above.

=== scandatawrite ===

Parameter :
1. channel: integer:integer
2. data: Matrix with Scan Channel Data

Return: None

Function: Write single channel of Scan Data

Usage:
stm.scandatawrite(channel, data); Presently only DAC units supported

Channels:
1:Topography
2: Current(ADC0)
3: ADC1
4: ADC2
5: ADC3
6: dI/dV
7: d2I/dV
8: df
9: Damping
10: Amplitude
11: CP(DAC1)
12: AUX1

=== scanauxdata ===

Property: Matrix with Scan Aux channel Data

Function: Read and write Scan AUX Data channel

Usage:
a=stm.scanauxdata; Presently only DAC units supported
stm.scanauxdata=a;

=== openscanchannel ===

Parameter :
1. channel integer
2. select :boolean

Return: none

Function: Activate specific Scan channel

Usage:
a=stm.openscanchannel(channel, true);

=== linescandata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with actual LineScan Data

Function: Read LineScan Data

Linescandata can be transferred into the Matlab workspace in a event driven manner. I.e. click the copy OLE/COM server popupmenue field in the Linescan window. This creates an event in Matlab which starts the
serverevents.m file which transfers the data to Matlab.

Columns
1: Distance in Angstrom
2: Y Values

Usage:
a=stm.linescandata;

=== timespecdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== timespecfftdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.timespec(3,0);

Channels:

=== latmandata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Lat manip Channel Data

Function: Read Lat manip Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.latmandata(channel,units);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: X
2: Y
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== vertdata ===

Parameter : channel: integer, units: integer

Return: Vector with Channel Data

Function: Read Channel Data

Columns
1: Channel in units

Usage:
a=stm.vertdata(3,1);

Channels:
0: time in sec
1: V
2: Z
3: Current I
4: dI/dV
5: d2I/dV
6: ADC0
7: ADC1
8: ADC2
9: ADC3
10: df
11: Damping
12: Amplitude
13: di_q
14: di2_q
15: Topography(DAC0)
16: CP(DAC1)

Units:
0: Default
1: Volt
2: DAC
3: Ampere
4: nm
5: Hz

=== pllspecdata ===

Parameter : None

Return: Array with PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Function: Read PLL Spectrum Scan Data

Columns
1: Frequency [Hz]
2: Amplitude [a.u.]
3: Phase [Deg]

Usage:
a=stm.pllspecdata;

=== strbuffer ===

Property

Parameter : None

Return: String with all parameters

Function: Read and write program parameter

Usage:
s=stm.strbuffer;

stm.strbuffer:=s;

=== pllfreqscan ===

Parameter : None

Return: none

Function: Start a new PLL Freqeuncy Scan

Usage:
a=stm.pllfreqscan;

=== vertspectrum ===

Parameter : None

Return: Ready or Error

Function: Takes a Vert.Spectrum at the current image point X,Y. Control is returned after the spectrum has been completely finished
The tip remains at the current lateral position
(low level command)

=== move_tip ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in relative DAC units
2. Y start position in relative DAC units
3. X end position in relative DAC units
4. Y end position in relative DAC units
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position. Coordinates are given in relative DAC units (relative: X,Y Offset and rotation are added afterwards)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.move_tip(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== move_tip_imagecoord ===

Parameter :
1. X start position in imagepixels
2. Y start position in imagepixels
3. X end position in imagepixels
4. Y end position in imagepixels
5. Number steps in which the tip moves from start to endpoint
6 Delay in DSP cycles between each step

Return: None

Function: Move tip to new position (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the move has been completely finished

Relation between imagepixel coordinates (0<=ximage<nx , 0<=yimage<ny ) and relative DAC coordinates (xdac,ydac):
(Top line in image is ny=0)

xdac:=trunc(ximage*dx - (nx div 2)*dx);
ydac:=trunc(yimage*dy);

On the DSP a final coordinate transformation is done including rotation, offset and drift correction to calculate the absolute DAC coordinates:
Using 20bit DACS the values are internal limited to +/- 524272.

xdacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmxx + ydac*rotmxy + rotoffx-driftxoff));
ydacabs= trunc ( - (xdac*rotmyx + ydac*rotmyy + rotoffy-driftyoff));

Usage:
stm.move_tip_imagecoord(50,50,100,100, 200,100);

=== latmanip ===

Parameter :
1. X coordinate in imagepixels of start point.
2 Y coordinate in imagepixels of start point
3. X coordinate in imagepixels of end point
4. Y coordinate in imagepixels of end point

Return: None

Function: Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. (Image pixel coordinates as displayed in the status line of the STMAFM main window)
Control is returned after the manipulation has been completely finished

Usage:
stm.latmanip(50,50,100,100);

=== latmanipxymove ===
(low level command)

Parameter :
1. X coordinate of start point in rel. DAC units.
2 Y coordinate of f start point in rel. DAC units.
3. X coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
4. Y coordinate of end point in rel. DAC units.
5. Number of steps
6. Delay between steps in DSP Cycles
7. Gain of Preamp during manipulation
8. Bias Voltage during manipulation
9. Current set point during manipulation in constant current mode

Return: None
Function:
Takes a lateral manipulation along a line defined by the start and end image points. Coordinates are in relative DAC units.
Control is returned after the scan has been completely finished.

The recorded data is saved in a file called 'manipxymove.data' placed in the active directory.
The file contains one line for each step. For each step the selected number of channels are recorded. (See LATMANIP form)

=== latmanbufferext ===

=== lockinstart ===

Parameter : None
Return: None

Function: Starts the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstart;

=== lockinstop ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Stops the internal lockin amplifier

Usage:

stm.lockinstop;

=== updatedspparam ===

Parameter: None

Function: Updates all parameters and synchronizes the the parameters with the DSP

Usage:

stm.updatedspparam;

=== updatedspfbparam ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: After changing the parameters this command allows to update/synchronize the parameters with the DSP.

For example changing a feedback loop parameter in the old parameter window will not automatically change this parameter on the DSP.
Therefore this update command has to be issued afterwards. Allows to set first the new parameters and then update all at the same time on the DSP.
(low level command)

=== sliderup ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step up

Usage:

stm.sliderup;

=== sliderdown ===

Parameter : None

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider one step down

Usage:

stm.sliderdown;

=== slider ===

Parameter :
channel
direction

Return: None

Function: Moves the slider

Usage:

stm.slider(1,0);

=== setdacval ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -524288 .. 524287

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are DAC Units (20bit)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1000);

=== setdacvalf ===
Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5
value -10.0 .. 10.0

Return: None

Function: Sets DAC value of selected channel. Units are Volt (float)

Usage:

stm.setdacval(1,2,1.034);

=== getadcval ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in DAC units (20bit)
Usage:

stm.getadcval(1,2);

=== getadcvalf ===

Parameter :
board 1..2
channel 0..5

Return: ADC value of selected channel

Function: Gets the ADC value. Units are in Volt

Usage:

stm.getadcvalf(1,2);

=== getdacvalfb ===

Parameter : none

Return: Value of z - Dac in Angstroem

Function: Gets the Feedback DAC Value

Example:
a=stm.getdacvalfb;

=== digoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write Digital Outputvalue on Board 1

Usage:

i:=stm.digoutvalue;

stm.digoutvalue:=i;

=== sbcdigoutvalue ===

Property Integer

Function: Read and write digital outputvalue on SBC6711Board

Usage:

i:=stm.sbcdigoutvalue;

stm.sbcdigoutvalue:=i;

=== serverneverclose ===

Parameter: None

Function: If activated makes sure that the STM Program will not close after the connection to the server is stopped, if the STM program was started by the client.

Usage:

stm.serverneverclose;

=== execmethod ===

Parameter:
Objectname
Methodname

Return: None

Function: Execute a specific function in the STM program. Specific debugging use only

Usage:

stm.execmethod('stmafm','Formmemoclick');

=== setxyoffvolt ===

Parameter :
x: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainX
y: Offset in Volt Range: (-10.0, +10.0) * HVGainY

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. Units are in Volt

Example:
stm.setxyoffsetvolt(12.5,-24.0);

=== setxyoffpixel ===
Parameter :
x: Offset in Pixel units
y: Offset in Pixel Units

Return: None

Function: Sets a new X_Offset, Y_Offset Value. The new offset is given by a pixel position in the present scanimage.

Example:
stm.setxypixel(100,78);

=== scandatabitmap ===

Parameter : none
Return: Array with Scan Channel Bitmap Data

Function: Get the the scanimage data as a bitmap.
The bitmap data is 32bit wide. The bitmap contains all channels.

Example:
a=stm.scandatabitmap;

=== pc32scanstatus ===

Parameter : none

Return: Scanstatus value on DSP Board

Function: Gets the scanstatus of the DSP program

Example:
a=stm.pc32scanstatus;

=== stmready ===
Parameter: none
Return: stmready 1: ready 0 not ready

Function: If stmready = 1 then the initialization of the STMAFM program is finshed.

Example:

a= stm.stmready;

=== setrampdspparam ===

Parameter: zheight: single -10 - + 10V
zduration: single
zburst: integer
xyheight:single
xyduration: single
xyburst: integer

Function: Sets the corresponding parameters of the rampcontroller

Example:

stm.setrampdspparam(1.0,0.01,100,2.0,0.02,200)

[[Category:stmafm_manual]]

QPlus Sensors

2015-01-05T07:45:30Z

Ltspm: Created page with "The qPlus sensors supplied by CreaTec are based on the work of Prof. Franz Giessibl (University of Regensburg, Germany) and therefore supplied by him. The nominell dimensions ..."

The qPlus sensors supplied by CreaTec are based on the work of Prof. Franz Giessibl (University of Regensburg, Germany) and therefore supplied by him. The nominell dimensions of the sensors are:
L=2.36mm, H=0.214mm, T=0.127mm.
Gluing the tip to the end of the sensor leads to a spring constant of 1800 N/m (+/-7%). The biggest error is given by the placement of the tip itself. For a more precise measurement of the spring constant (k) one has to measure the resonace frequency without tip first:
f0 = sqrt(k/0.243m)/(2Pi). The biggest error of k of the bare sensor is within the thickness (T) of the sensor. It's needed for calculating the sensor mass m = rho_quartz*L*H*T, (rho_quartz = 2.203 g/cm3).